Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Math3lit-Livre Scolaire PDF
Math3lit-Livre Scolaire PDF
Math3lit-Livre Scolaire PDF
ﺇﺸﺭﺍﻑ ﻭ ﺘﺄﻝﻴﻑ
ﻤﻔﺘﺵ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻝﺘﻜﻭﻴﻥ ﺠﻤﺎل ﺘﺎﻭﺭﻴﺭﺕ
ﺍﻝﻤﺅﻝﻔﻭﻥ:
ﻤﻔﺘﺵ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻝﺘﻜﻭﻴﻥ ↵ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﻓﺎﺘﺢ ﻤﺭﺍﺩ
ﻤﻔﺘﺵ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻝﺘﻜﻭﻴﻥ ↵ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﻗﻭﺭﻴﻥ
ﺃﺴﺘﺎﺫ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻭﻱ ↵ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻔﻴﻅ ﻓﻼﺡ
ﺃﺴﺘﺎﺫ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻭﻱ ↵ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺅﻤﻥ ﻤﻭﺱ
ﺃﺴﺘﺎﺫ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻭﻱ ↵ ﻏﺭﻴﺴﻲ ﺒﻠﺠﻴﻼﻝﻲ
ﺒﺎﻹﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﺭﺍﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻡ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﻬﺎﺝ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺤﺎﻭﻝﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﻤل ﺒﻤﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺠﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻴـﻪ
ﻜﻤﺎ ﺤﺭﺼﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺘﺠﺴﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺒﻨﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺨﻼل ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ ﻤﻨﺎﺴـﺒﺔ
ﺴﻭﺍﺀ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻔﺎﻫﻴﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺇﺩﻤﺎﺠﻬﺎ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺤﻅﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺘﻜﻨﻭﻝﻭﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ
ﻭ ﺍﻻﺘﺼﺎل ﺒﺎﻻﻫﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﻼﺯﻡ.
ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺴﺘﺔ ) (6ﺃﺒﻭﺍﺏ ﺘﻤﺕ ﻫﻴﻜﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﺤﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
• ﻋﺭﺽ ﻝﻠﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻬﺩﻓﺔ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﺒﺫﺓ ﺘﺎﺭﻴﺨﻴﺔ.
• ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ ﺘﻤﻬﻴﺩﻴﺔ.
• ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ.
• ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ ﻭ ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ.
• ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ.
• ﺍﺴﺘﻌﺩ ﻝﻠﺒﻜﺎﻝﻭﺭﻴﺎ.
• ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻤﺴﺎﺌل.
• ﺍﺨﺘﺒﺭ ﻤﻌﻠﻭﻤﺎﺘﻙ.
ﺃﺭﺩﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺠﻌل ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻭﺴﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻤل ﻤﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﻭ ﻨﺎﺠﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ،ﻨﺘﻤﻨﻰ ﺃﻥ
ﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﻝﻜﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻀﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻴﺩ ﻻﻤﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ.
ﻭ ﻜﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻌﻤل ﺇﻨﺠﺎﺯﺍ ﺒﺸﺭﻴﺎ ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﻻ ﻴﺨﻠﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﺎﺌﺹ ،ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺈﻨﻨﺎ ﻨﺭﺤﺏ ،ﺒﻜل ﺍﻫﺘﻤـﺎﻡ،
ﺒﺎﻨﺘﻘﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻬﺩﻑ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺇﺜﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ ﺘﺤﺴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻡ ﻤﺸﻜﻭﺭﻭﻥ ﻤﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻝﻙ.
.1ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل:
.Iﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ :
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ f ( x ) = x3 − x 2 − 2 :
.2ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ:
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل )un = f (n
• ﻨﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺒـun = 2n 2 − n − 3 :
1 0 ﻭ ﻝﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ n
ﻨﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﻭﻨﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ seq
.4ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺀ:
ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﺍﻝﻜﺘﻠﺔ )(g 300 400 500 600 700
ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ 40 45 51 54 57
ﺍﻨﻘﺭ ﻹﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻹﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺠﻤﺎﻝﻲ EDIT
ﻓﺘﺴﺠل ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ، L4 ﻓﻲ : L3 ﻭ ﺍﺘﻤﻡ ﺍﻝﻘﻭﺍﺌﻡ
ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ L4 ﺤﺩﺩ L4ﺜﻡ MATH5
(L2)2
(L3)3ﺜﻡ )(1 (L2) 2 )(Sum
.5ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﻴﻴﺱ:
ا :ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻨﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ ) (CRY PTOGRAPHIEﻤﻨﺫ ﻨﺤﻭ ﺃﻝﻔﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﻤﻴﻼﺩ ﻝﺤﻤﺎﻴﺔ
ﺭﺴﺎﺌﻠﻪ ﺍﻝﺴﺭﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺒﻠﻎ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﺨﺩﺍﻡ ﺫﺭﻭﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻭﺏ ﺨﻭﻓ ﹰﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﺎﺌل ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺴﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﺃﻴﺩﻱ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﻭ .ﻭﻗﺎﻡ ﻴﻭﻝﻴﻭﺱ ﻗﻴﺼﺭ ﺒﺘﻁﻭﻴﺭ ﺨﻭﺍﺭﺯﻤﻴﺘﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﺴﻡ ﺸﻔﺭﺓ ﻗﻴﺼﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ
ﻨﺼﺎ ﻤﺸﻔﱠﺭﹰﺍ ﻝﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﺘﺼﺎﻻﺘﻪ ﻭﻤﺭﺍﺴﻼﺘﻪ ﻤﻊ ﻗﺎﺩﺓ ﺠﻴﻭﺸﻪ.
ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺼﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺨﻭﺍﺭﺯﻤﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺘﻌﻭﻴﺽ ﻜل ﺤﺭﻑ ﺒﺤﺭﻑ ﺁﺨﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺨﻼل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ
ﺴﺤﺏ ﺨﻁﻴﺔ ﻝﻜل ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻭﻑ.ﻓﻤﺜﻼ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺒﺠﺩﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻭﻀﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ﺍ
ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺭﻑ ﺩ ،ﻨﻌﻭﺽ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺭﻑ ﻫـ ،ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ﺝ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺭﻑ ﻭ ﺇﻝﺦ...
ﻥ ﻡ ل ﻙ ﻱ ﻁ ﺡ ﺯ ﻭ ﻩ ﺩ ﺝ ﺏ ﺃ
ﻑ ﻉ ﺱ ﻥ ﻡ ل ﻙ ﻱ ﻁ ﺡ ﺯ ﻭ ﻩ ﺩ
ﻍ ﻅ ﺽ ﺫ ﺥ ﺙ ﺕ ﺵ ﺭ ﻕ ﺹ ﻑ ﻉ ﺱ
ﺝ ﺏ ﺃ ﻍ ﻅ ﺽ ﺫ ﺥ ﺙ ﺕ ﺵ ﺭ ﻕ ﺹ
7
اط اول
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ : 1ﻨﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺘﺎﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﺴﺎﻭﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﻜل ﻗﻭﺍﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﻤﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ﻨﻔﺴﻪ.
ﻓﻤﺜﻼ 6ﻋﺩﺩ ﻜﺎﻤل ﻷﻥ ﻗﻭﺍﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ 3 ، 2 ، 1ﻭ 6ﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ . 1 + 2 + 3 = 6
.1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ 28ﻭ 496ﻜﺎﻤﻼﻥ.
.2ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ 27ﻭ 30ﺒﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﻗﻭﺍﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﻤﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ﻨﻔﺴﻪ.
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ : 2ﻨﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﺤﺎﺒﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﻘﻭﺍﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﻷﺤﺩﻫﻤﺎ ﻤﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ﻨﻔﺴﻪ
ﻤﺴﺎﻭﻴﺎ ﻝﻶﺨﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻜﺱ.
.3ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ 220ﻭ 284ﻤﺘﺤﺎﺒﺎﻥ.
ﻫل ﺘﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ " ﻝﻴﻴﻭﻨﺎﺭﺩ ﺃﻭﻝﺭ" ﻗﺩ ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ
ﺍﻵﻝﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 2305843008139 952128ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﺜﺎﻝﻲ.
" ﻝﻴﻴﻭﻨﺎﺭﺩ ﺃﻭﻝﺭ" ﻤﻥ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﺫﻴﻥ ﻋﺭﻓﻬﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﺭﻴﺦ ،ﺍﺴﺘﻘ ﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﺩﺍﻴﺔ ﺒﹻ
ﺴﺎﻥ ﺒﻴﺘﺭﺴﺒﻭﺭﻕ ﺜﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺒﺭﻝﻴﻥ ﺴﻨﺔ 1741ﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﺭﺃﺱ ﺃﻜﺎﺩﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻡ ﺇﻝﻰ
ﻏﺎﻴﺔ . 1766
ا
،ا
ء و ا ت و ه %#أ
'( !"#ع
ا' *0ت ا ( .-ا *,-ا )*+و ا3د1ت ا.
*0)-
EULER Leonhard
Suisse, 1707-1783
اط ا
137 12 .1ﺒﺈﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻭ ﺤﺎﺼل ﻗﺴﻤﺔ aﻋﻠﻰ b
17 11 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ:
5
∗ a = 676ﻭ . b = 13 ∗ a = 312ﻭ ، b = 46
ها137 = 12 ×11 + 5 : .2ﺃﺤﺼﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ aﺒﻴﻥ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ b
8
اط ا
ﻨﺫﻜﺭ ﺃﻥ ] a ≡ b [ nﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻥ aﻭ bﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . n
ﻹﻨﺠﺎﺯ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ﺍﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻝﺨﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
∗ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻭ ﺤﺠﺯﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ ، D 2ﺃﺤﺠﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺘﻴﻥ A 2ﻭ B 2ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ nﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺘﻴﻥ G 2ﻭ H 2ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺁﺨﺭﻴﻥ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . n
∗ ﻝﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ aﻋﻠﻰ nﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ A 3ﺃﺤﺠﺯ ) = MOD (A 2; D 2ﺜﻡ ﻭﺍﺼل ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ...
∗ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺠﺯ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ pﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ ، E 2ﺃﺤﺠﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ = PUISSANCE(A2;E2) : G 5ﺜﻡ ﻭﺍﺼل ...
.1ﻻﺤﻅ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﺍﻝﺒﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺭ 6ﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ c ، b ، aﻭ dﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ
ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﻴﻥ nﻭ pﻭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺩﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
b؟ p
.2ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ a + cﻭ b + d؟ a × cﻭ b × d؟ aﻭ
p
ﺍﻝﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﺒﻊ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺩﻴﻡ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻨﺎﻥ ﻴﺘﻌﺎﻤﻠﻭﻥ ﺠﻴﺩﺍ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻡ ﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺘﻭﺼﻠﻭﺍ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﺠﻤﻌﻨﺎ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺘﺎﺒﻊ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺘﺎﻡ ﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ 1:ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 1 + 3 = 4 ،1ﻭ 4ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 1 + 3 + 5 = 9 ،2ﻭ 9ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ... ،3
(1ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﺒﺈﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﺨﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ Bﻭ ﺍﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ B 2ﺃﺤﺠﺯ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ .49
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ C 3ﺃﺤﺠﺯ = B 2 + B 3ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ C 4ﺃﺤﺠﺯ = C 3 + B 4
ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺤﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻷﺴﻔل ﺒﻊ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ . C 4
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ. S = 1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + 9 + 11 + 13 :
. S ′ = 1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + 9 + ... + 21 + 23
. S ′′ = 1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + 9 + ... + 47 + 49ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟
(3ﺨﻤﻥ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ) 1 + 3 + 5 + ... + ( 2n −1ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
(4ﺒﻔﺭﺽ ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺤﻴﺙ n ≥ 1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺼﺤﺘﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . n + 1
ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺍﺜﻴﺔ.
ﻨﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ) P ( nﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺃﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺭﺍﺜﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n + 1
ﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . n
9
↵ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ℤ
.1ﻗﺎﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ℤ
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ a :ﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﻥ ﻭ bﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ bﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ aﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ
ﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ kﺤﻴﺙ . a = kb :ﻨﻘﻭل ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﺃﻥ bﻗﺎﺴﻡ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ aﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ aﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . b
ﻨﻜﺘﺏ b aﻭ ﻨﻘﺭﺃ bﻴﻘﺴﻡ . a
ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ:
48 = 8× 6ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ 6 48 •
• ) 48 = (−8)×(−6ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ (−6) 48
• (−65) = (−13)×5ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ )5 (−65
• (−65) = (−13)×5ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ )(−13) (−65
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻥ aﻭ −aﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻘﻭﺍﺴﻡ ﻓﻲ a = kb ) ℤﻴﻌﻨﻲ ( −a = (−k )b
10
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل:1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ aﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، bﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺼﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ aﺒﻴﻥ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﻴﻥ
ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ bﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ.
a = −7361 .3ﻭ . b = 47 a = 725 .2ﻭ . b = 91 a = 8159 .1ﻭ . b = 52
ﺤل 156 . 8159 = 52×156 + 47 .1 :ﻫﻭ ﺤﺎﺼل ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 8159ﻋﻠﻰ 52ﻭ 47ﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 8159ﻋﻠﻰ . 52
52×156 ≤ 8159 < 52×157ﺃﻱ . 8112 ≤ 8159 < 8164
7 . 725 = 91× 7 + 88 .2ﻫﻭ ﺤﺎﺼل ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 725ﻋﻠﻰ 91ﻭ 88ﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 725ﻋﻠﻰ . 91
91× 7 ≤ 725 < 91×8ﺃﻱ . 637 ≤ 725 < 728
− 157 . −7361 = 47 ×(−157) + 18 .3ﻫﻭ ﺤﺎﺼل ﻗﺴﻤﺔ −7361ﻋﻠﻰ 47ﻭ 18ﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ
−7361ﻋﻠﻰ 47 ×(−157) ≤ −7361 < 47 ×(−156) . 47ﺃﻱ . −7379 ≤ −7361 < −7332
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل a :2ﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ 10ﻫﻭ . 6
.2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ aﻋﻠﻰ 2؟ .1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ aﻋﻠﻰ 5؟
a = 10k + 6ﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ . ﺤل:
a = 10k + 5 + 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ a = 5 (2k + 1) + 1ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ aﻋﻠﻰ 5ﻫﻭ . 1 .1
) a = 2(5k + 3ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ aﻋﻠﻰ 2ﻫﻭ . 0 .2
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :3ﺤﻠل ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 1372ﺇﻝﻰ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻭﺍﻤل ﺃﻭﻝﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻗﻭﺍﺴﻤﻪ .
α
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻋﺩﺩ ﻗﻭﺍﺴﻡ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻪ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻭﺍﻤل ﺃﻭﻝﻴﺔ n = a1α1 × a2α 2 × ... × a p pﻫﻭ :
)(α1 + 1) × (α 2 + 1) × ... × (α p + 1
ﻨﺤﺴﺏ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ .
ﺤل. 1372 = 22 × 73 (1:ﻋﺩﺩ ﻗﻭﺍﺴﻡ 1372ﻫﻭ . ( 2 + 1)( 3 + 1) = 12ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 1372ﻴﻘﺒل ﺇﺫﻥ 12ﻗﺎﺴﻤﺎ .
(2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ D1372ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻗﻭﺍﺴﻡ . 1372ﻹﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ D1372ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺸﺠﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ .
1
7
20 1
7×7=49
2 7×49=343
2×7=14
4
2×7×49=686
4×7=28
22
1; 2; 4;7;14; 28; 49;98; 4 4×49=196
D1372 = ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻗﻭﺍﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 1372ﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ
196;343; 686;1372
4×343=1372
11
↵ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ℤ
.1ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ n :ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻥ aﻭ bﻤﺘﻭﺍﻓﻘﺎﻥ ﺒﺘﺭﺩﻴﺩ n
ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ aﻭ bﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . n
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ] a ≡ b [ nﻭ ﻨﻘﺭﺃ aﻴﻭﺍﻓﻕ bﺒﺘﺭﺩﻴﺩ . n
ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ. −59 ≡ −3[8] ، −20 ≡ 1[7 ] ، 24 ≡ 3[7 ] ، 12 ≡ 34[11] ، 27 ≡ 92 [5] :
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ . x ≡ 0 [1] ، x
.2ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ a :ﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﻥ ﻭ nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﹻ aﻭ bﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ nﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a − bﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . n
ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﻝﹻ aﻭ bﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ rﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . n
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻨﻀﻊ a = nq + rﻭ b = nq '+ rﺤﻴﺙ qﻭ ' qﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﻥ ﻭ . 0 ≤ r < n
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ )' . a − b = nq + r − nq '− r = n (q − qﺒﻭﻀﻊ ' q ′′ = q − qن
a − b = nq ′′
q ′′ 7#د .8*,ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺃﻥ a − bﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝـ . n
ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺎ :ﻨﻔﺭﺽ a − bﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝـ . nﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ kﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ . a − b = k n
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ rﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ bﻋﻠﻰ . n
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ b = nq + rﺤﻴﺙ qﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭ . 0 ≤ r < n
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . a = b + k n = nq + r + k n = ( q + k ) n + r
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ q + kﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭ 0 ≤ r < nﻓﺈﻥ rﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ aﻋﻠﻰ . n
ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﻝﹻ aﻭ bﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . n
ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ a :ﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﻥ ﻭ nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .ﻴﻜﻭﻥ aﻭ bﻤﺘﻭﺍﻓﻘﻴﻥ ﺒﺘﺭﺩﻴﺩ nﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ
a − bﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ ﻝـ . n
12
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :1ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ ﺃﺫﻜﺭ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻁﺌﺔ:
58 ≡ −5[7 ] (4 ؛ 478 ≡ 32 [5] (3 ؛ −32 ≡ 18[10] (2 ؛ 26 ≡ 11[5] (1
483 ≡ 36 [7 ] (8 ؛ 1312 ≡ 25[12] (7 ؛ 144 ≡ 11[19] (6 ؛ 632 ≡ 14 [5] (5
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻝﻠﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ] a ≡ b [ nﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ a − bﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝِـ nﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻝﹻ aﻭ b
ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . n
ﺤل:
26 −11 = 15 (1ﻭ . 15 = 3×5ﺇﺫﻥ ] 26 ≡ 11[5ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
−32 −18 = −50 (2ﻭ . −50 = (−5)×10ﺇﺫﻥ ] −32 ≡ 18[10ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
478 − 32 = 446 (3ﻭ . 446 = 89× 5 + 1ﺇﺫﻥ ] 478 ≡ 32 [5ﺨﺎﻁﺌﺔ .ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ ]. 478 ≡ 32 [5
58 + 5 = 63 (4ﻭ . 63 = 9× 7ﺇﺫﻥ ] 58 ≡ −5[7ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
. 632 = 3969 (5ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 632ﻋﻠﻰ 5ﻫﻭ ﺇﺫﻥ 4ﻭﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 14ﻋﻠﻰ 5ﻫﻭ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ 4ﻓﺈﻥ
] 63 2 ≡ 14 [5ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
144 = 19× 7 + 11 (6ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 144ﻴﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺒﺘﺭﺩﻴﺩ 19ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ 19ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ
] 144 ≡ 11[19ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
131 2 = 1430×12 + 1 (7ﻭ 25 = 2×12 + 1ﺘﺤﺼﻠﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 12ﺇﺫﻥ
] 131 2 ≡ 25[12ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
48 3 = 15799× 7 + 6 (8ﻭ 36 = 5× 7 + 1ﻝﻡ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 7ﺇﺫﻥ
] 483 ≡ 36 [7ﺨﺎﻁﺌﺔ .ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ ] . 483 ≡ 36 [7
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ )] ( a ≡ b [ nﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ aﻋﻠﻰ nﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ b
ﻋﻠﻰ ، nﺜﻡ ﺃﺫﻜﺭ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺨﻁﺄ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ.
158 ≡ 39 [17 ] (4 ؛ 471 ≡ 30[8] (3 ؛ −322 ≡ 78[ 4] (2 ؛ 262 ≡ 927 [5] (1
ﺤل:
262 = 5×52 + 2 (1ﻭ 927 = 5×185 + 2ﺇﺫﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 262ﻋﻠﻰ 5ﻫﻭ 2ﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 927
ﻋﻠﻰ 5ﻫﻭ 2ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ 262ﻭ 927ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 5ﺇﺫﻥ ] 262 ≡ 927 [5ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ .
−322 = 4×(−81) + 2 (2ﻭ 78 = 4×19 + 2ﺇﺫﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ −322ﻋﻠﻰ 4ﻫﻭ 2ﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ
78ﻋﻠﻰ 4ﻫﻭ 2ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ −322ﻭ 78ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 4ﺇﺫﻥ ] −322 ≡ 78[ 4ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ .
471 = 8×58 + 7 (3ﻭ 30 = 8×3 + 6ﺇﺫﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 471ﻋﻠﻰ 8ﻫﻭ 7ﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 30ﻋﻠﻰ 8ﻫﻭ 6
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ 471ﻭ 30ﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 8ﺇﺫﻥ ] 471 ≡ 30[8ﺨﺎﻁﺌﺔ .ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ ]. 471≡ 30 [8
158 = 17×9 + 5 (4ﻭ 39 = 17 × 2 + 5ﺇﺫﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 158ﻋﻠﻰ 17ﻫﻭ 5ﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 39ﻋﻠﻰ 17
ﻫﻭ 5ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ 158ﻭ 39ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 17ﺇﺫﻥ ] 158 ≡ 39[17ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
13
↵ ﺨﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ℤ
ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ :1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ aﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ. a ≡ a [ n ] :
ا%هن :ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ a − a = 0 × nﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ a − aﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . n
ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ a :2ﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﻥ ﻭ nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ] a ≡ b [ nﻓﺈﻥ ] . b ≡ a [ n
ا%هن :إذا آن ﻝﹻ aﻭ bﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ nﻓﺈﻥ ﻝﹻ bﻭ aﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ . n
ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ) 3ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺩﻱ( n :ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ b ، a .ﻭ cﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) ] a ≡ b [ nﻭ ] ( b ≡ c [ nﻓﺈﻥ ] . a ≡ c [ n
ا%هن b ، a :ﻭ cﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ ) ] a ≡ b [ nﻭ ] .( b ≡ c [ n
) ] a ≡ b [ nﻭ ] ( b ≡ c [ nﻴﻌﻨﻲ ) a − b = k nﻭ k )( b − c = k ' nﻭ ' kﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﻥ (
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺠﻤﻊ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ . a − c = ( k + k ') nﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ' k + kﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﺈﻥ ] . a ≡ c [ n
ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ) 4ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻼﺅﻡ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻊ( n :ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ c ، b ، a .ﻭ dﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) ] a ≡ b [ nﻭ ] ( c ≡ d [ nﻓﺈﻥ ] . a + c ≡ b + d [ n
ا%هن c ، b ، a :ﻭ dﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ ) ] a ≡ b [ nﻭ ] .( c ≡ d [ n
) ] a ≡ b [ nﻭ ] ( c ≡ d [ nﻴﻌﻨﻲ ) a − b = k nﻭ k )( c − d = k ' nﻭ ' kﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﻥ (
ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺠﻤﻊ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ . (a + c ) − (b + d ) = (k + k ') nﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ' k + kﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﺈﻥ ] . a + c ≡ b + d [ n
ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ) 5ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻼﺅﻡ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻀﺭﺏ( n :ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ c ، b ، a .ﻭ dﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) ] a ≡ b [ nﻭ ] ( c ≡ d [ nﻓﺈﻥ ] . a ×c ≡ b ×d [ n
14
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :1ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ b = 837 ، a = 255 :ﻭ . c = 3691
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ b ، aﻭ cﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . 11
.2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﻜل ﻤﻥ . a ×b × c ، a 2 ، a + b + c ، a × c ، a + b
ﺤل:
.1ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻨﺠﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺒﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ b ، aﻭ cﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 11ﻫﻲ 6 ، 1 ، 2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
]a ≡ 2 [11
ﻭ ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻊ ﻨﺠﺩ ] a + b ≡ 3[11ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻫﻭ.3 .2ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
]b ≡ 1[11
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ] a ≡ 2[11ﻭ ] . c ≡ 6 [11ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻀﺭﺏ ﻨﺠﺩ ] ac ≡ 12 [11ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ]12 ≡ 1 [11
ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﻌﺩﻱ ] ac ≡ 1[11ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻫﻭ.1
]a ≡ 2 [11
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ b ≡ 1[11] :ﻭ ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻊ ﻨﺠﺩ ] a + b + c ≡ 9[11ﻭ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻫﻭ . 9
] c ≡ 6 [11
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ a ≡ 2 [11] :ﻭ ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ 6ﻨﺠﺩ ] a ≡ 2 [11ﺃﻱ ] a ≡ 4[11ﻭ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻫﻭ . 4
2 2 2
]a ≡ 2[11
] b ≡ 1[11ﻭ ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻀﺭﺏ ﻨﺠﺩ ] a ×b × c ≡ 1× 2× 6[11ﺃﻱ ]a ×b × c ≡ 12 [11
] c ≡ 6[11
ﻭ ] 12 ≡ 1[11ﻭ ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺩﻱ ﻨﺠﺩ ] a ×b × c ≡ 1[11ﻭ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻫﻭ .1
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل a :2ﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ ] a ≡ 3 [5ﻭ ]. b ≡ 4 [5
.1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 2a + bﻴﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . 5
.2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 2a 2 + b 2ﻋﻠﻰ . 5
.3ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ] . b ≡ −1 [5ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ b 2007ﻭ b 1428ﻋﻠﻰ . 5
ﺤل:
]2a ≡ 1 [5 ]2a ≡ 6 [5 ]a ≡ 3 [5
ﻷﻥ ] . 6 ≡ 1 [5ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻊ ﻨﺤﺼل ﺃﻱ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ .1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ
] b ≡ 4 [5 ] b ≡ 4 [5 ]b ≡ 4 [5
ﻋﻠﻰ 2a + b ≡ 5 [5] :ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ] 5 ≡ 0 [5ﻓﺈﻥ ] . 2a + b ≡ 0 [5ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 2a + bﻋﻠﻰ 5ﻫﻭ . 0ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ
ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 2a + bﻴﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . 5
]2a 2 ≡ 3 [5 ] 2a 2 ≡ 2×9 [5 ]a ≡ 3 [5
2ﻷﻥ ] 18 ≡ 3 [5ﻭ ]. 16 ≡ 1 [5 2ﺃﻱ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ .2ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ
b ≡ 1 [ 5 ] b ≡ 16 [ 5 ] ]b ≡ 4 [5
ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻊ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ . 2a + b ≡ 4 [5] :ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 2a + bﻋﻠﻰ 5ﻫﻭ ﺇﺫﻥ . 4
2 2 2 2
.3ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺍﻀﺢ ﺃﻥ ] 4 ≡ −1 [5ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺩﻱ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ]. b ≡ −1 [5
) b 2007 ≡ ( −1ﻭ ] b 1428 ≡ 11428 [5ﺃﻱ ] b 2007 ≡ −1[5ﻭ ]. b 1428 ≡ 1[5 ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ 6ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ][5
2007
ﻫﻭ 4ﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ b 1428ﻋﻠﻰ 5ﻫﻭ . 1 ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ] −1 ≡ 4 [5ﻓﺈﻥ ] . b 2007 ≡ 4 [5ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ b 2007ﻋﻠﻰ 5
15
↵ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﺩﻻل ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻊ
.1ﻤﺒﺩﺃ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﺩﻻل ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻊ
ﻤﺴﻠﻤﺔ P ( n) :ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺒﻌﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻭ n0ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﻝﻠﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ) P ( nﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ n0ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ:
.1ﻨﺘﺄﻜﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل n0ﺃﻱ ) . P ( n0
.2ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻜﻴﻔﻲ nﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ n0ﺃﻱ ) P (n
) ﻓﺭﻀﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻊ( ﻭ ﻨﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل n + 1ﺃﻱ ). P (n + 1
ﻓﺈﻥ
.2ﻤﺜﺎل
)n ( n + 1
= " 1 + 2 + 3 + ... + n ﻝﻨﺜﺒﺕ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ " :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ،
2
1× 2
= 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل . n = 1 ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺤﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل n = 1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
2
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ) ﺍﻝﻭﺭﺍﺜﺔ (:
)n ( n + 1
= . 1 + 2 + 3 + ... + n • ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺤﻴﺙ n ≥ 1ﺃﻱ:
2
= ). 1 + 2 + 3 + ... + n + ( n + 1
• ﻝﻨﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل n + 1ﺃﻱ( n + 1)( n + 2 ) :
2
)n ( n + 1
= )1 + 2 + 3 + ... + n + ( n + 1) = (1 + 2 + 3 + ... + n ) + ( n + 1 ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ+ ( n + 1) :
2
) n ( n + 1) + 2 ( n + 1) ( n + 1)( n + 2
= ). 1 + 2 + 3 + ... + n + ( n + 1 = ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
2 2
)n ( n + 1
= " 1 + 2 + 3 + ... + n ﺍﻝﺨﻼﺼﺔ " :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ،
2
16
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل:1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ،ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻻﺴﺘﺩﻻل ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻊ ،ﺃﻨﻪ:
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، nﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ n3 − nﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . 3
ﺤل:
ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ " n3 − nﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ " 3ﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . nﻨﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻻﺴﺘﺩﻻل ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻊ.
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺤﻠﺔ :1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل 03 − 0 = 0 = 3× 0 ، n = 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ 03 − 0ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ .3
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل . n = 0
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺤﻠﺔ :2ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺤﻴﺙ n ≥ 0
ﺃﻱ n3 − n :ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ .3
ﻨﻀﻊ n3 − n = 3kﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ .ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ n3 = 3k + n
ﻭ ﻨﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل n + 1ﺃﻱ (n + 1) − ( n + 1)ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ .3
3
3
(n + 1) −(n +1) = n3 + 3n 2 + 3n +1− n −1 = (3k + n) + 3n 2 + 2n
3
)(n + 1) −(n +1) = 3k + 3n2 + 3n = 3(k + n2 + n
ﻭ ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ) 3( k + n 2 + nﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 3ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ) (n + 1) − ( n + 1ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . 3
3
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :2ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﹻ ) P (nﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ " :ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 3ﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 4n + 1ﺤﻴﺙ nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ".
.1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، nﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ) P ( nﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ) P ( n + 1ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
.2ﻫل ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ) P ( nﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n؟ ﺍﺸﺭﺡ.
ﺤل:
.1ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ) P (nﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻜﻴﻔﻲ nﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 3ﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 4n + 1ﻭ ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻌﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ
ﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﻭﻀﻊ 4n + 1 = 3kﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ.
ﻝﻨﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ) P ( n +1ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 3ﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . 4n +1 + 1
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ 4n +1 + 1 = 4 × 4n + 1ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ) 4n = 3k − 1ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﻀﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ( ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ:
4n +1 + 1 = 4 ( 3k − 1) + 1
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ 4n +1 + 1 = 4 × 3k − 4 + 1 = 3 ( 4k ) − 3ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ). 4n +1 + 1 = 3 ( 4k − 1
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ 4n +1 + 1 = 3k ′ﻤﻊ k ′ = 4k − 1ﻭ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ .ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 3ﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . 4n +1 + 1
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻓﺎﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ) P (n + 1ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ.
.2ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ) P (nﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻓﻼﺒﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺼﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﻤﻥ
ﺃﺠل n = 0ﻷﻥ ﻭﺭﺍﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ.
ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل n = 0ﻷﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 3ﻻ ﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 2ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل
ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . n
17
ﺍﻝﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ
ﻴﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ ﻹﺨﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻭﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺍﺴﻼﺕ ﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺸﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻴﺎﻤﻨﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺼﻁﻠﺢ.
ﺘﺘﻠﺨﺹ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻜل ﺤﺭﻑ ﺃﺒﺠﺩﻱ ﻤﺭﻗﻡ ﺒﻌﺩﺩ ) xﺤﻴﺙ 0 ≤ x ≤ 27ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻷﺒﺠﺩﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺭﺒﻴﺔ (
ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ yﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ a x + bﻋﻠﻰ 28ﺃﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﹻ ] y ≡ ax + b [ 28ﺤﻴﺙ ( a ≠ 0 ) aﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ
ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﻠﻭﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴل ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒل .ﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) ( a ;bﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻝﺸﻔﺭﺓ.
.1ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل a = 3ﻭ b = 7ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
ﻥ ﻡ ل ﻙ ﻱ ﻁ ﺡ ﺯ ﻭ ﻫـ ﺩ ﺝ ﺏ ﺃ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 x
18 15 12 9 6 3 0 25 22 19 16 13 10 7 y
ﻕ ﻉ ﻡ ﻱ ﺯ ﺩ ﺃ ﺽ ﺙ ﺭ ﻑ ﻥ ﻙ ﺡ ﺍﻝﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ
ﻍ ﻅ ﺽ ﺫ ﺥ ﺙ ﺕ ﺵ ﺭ ﻕ ﺹ ﻑ ﻉ ﺱ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 x
4 1 26 23 20 17 14 11 8 5 2 27 24 21 y
ﻫـ ﺏ ﻅ ﺥ ﺵ ﺹ ﺱ ل ﻁ ﻭ ﺝ ﻍ ﺫ ﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭﻫﺎ " ﻙ ﺡ ﻱ " " ،ﺡ ﻡ ﻥ ﺽ ﺡ ﺯ ﻁ " •
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭﺍ ﻝﻠﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ " ﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺠﻭﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻴﺩ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻘﻼل " •
.2ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ:
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ) ( 3;5ﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺠﺩﻭل ﻤﻤﺎﺜل ﻝﻠﺴﺎﺒﻕ. •
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ) ( 3;5ﻝﻔﻙ ﺍﻝﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ ﻭ ﻗﺭﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ":ﻭﺵ ﻙ ﻑ ﺵ ﺽ ﻥ ﻁ ﺯ ﺙ ﻩ ﺱ ﻭ ﻙ ﻉ ﺵ ﺯ " •
ﻗﻡ ﺒﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ ﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﻜﻡ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﻴﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻠﺏ ﻤﻥ ﺯﻤﻴﻠﻙ ﻓﻜﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻗﺭﺍﺀﺘﻬﺎ. •
.3ﻤﻼﺤﻅ ﻫﺎﻤﺔ
ﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﺍﻵﻥ a = 7ﻭ b = 3
. 7 × 9 + 3 ≡ 7 ×1 + 3 ][ 28 ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﺜﻼ ﺃﻥ •
ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺭﻓﻴﻥ ﺏ ﻭ ﻱ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺒﺠﺩﻴﺔ ؟ •
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺒﺠﺩﻴﺔ ،ﺤﺭﻓﻴﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ. •
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺒﺠﺩﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭﻫﺎ . 3 •
ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﺜﻼ ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﺤﺭﻭﻑ ﻴﺘﻡ ﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭﻫﺎ ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ﻤﻤﺎ ﻴﺴﺒﺏ ﺼﻌﻭﺒﺎﺕ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴل
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒل.
ﻋﻴﻥ ) . PGCD ( a ; 28ﻫل ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﺍﻥ aﻭ 28ﺃﻭﻝﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ؟ •
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺘﺠﻨﺒﺎ ﻝﻠﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻤﺎﺜﻠﺔ ﻝﻠﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ aﺃﻭﻝﻴﺎ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 28ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺒﺠﺩﻴﺔ.
18
ﻴﻭﻡ ﺍﻷﺴﺒﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﺘﺎﺭﻴﺨﺎ ﻤﻌﻴﻨﺎ
ﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﺃﻭل ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ 2007ﻴﻭﻡ ﺍﻻﺜﻨﻴﻥ .ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﻴﻭﻡ ﺍﻷﺴﺒﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻴﻭﻡ ﻤﻥ
ﺍﻝﺴﻨﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺩﻤﺔ.
(1ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻡ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺠﻭﻴﻠﻴﺔ .1962
ـ ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻴﺎﻡ nﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻔﺼل ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻭل ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ 2007ﻭ ﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺠﻭﻴﻠﻴﺔ ) 1962ﻻ ﻴﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﻻ
ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﺭﻴﺨﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﺒﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺃﻴﺎﻤﻬﺎ . ( 366
ـ ﺒﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﺴﺎﺒﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ، 7ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺴﺎﺒﻴﻊ qﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﺕ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﺭﻴﺨﻴﻥ.
ـ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ rﻝﻸﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻤﺭﻭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺴﺎﺒﻴﻊ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﺭﻴﺨﻴﻥ .ﺃﻜﺘﺏ nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ qﻭ . r
ـ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻴﻭﻡ ﺍﻷﺴﺒﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺠﻭﻴﻠﻴﺔ.1962
(2ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻴﻭﻡ ﺍﻷﺴﺒﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﺃﻭل ﻨﻭﻓﻤﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺩﻤﺔ.
(3ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻴﻭﻡ ﺍﻷﺴﺒﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻔﺎل ﺒﻤﺭﻭﺭ ﻗﺭﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺘﺎﺭﻴﺦ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻘﻼل ؟
(4ﻋﻴﻥ ﻴﻭﻡ ﺍﻷﺴﺒﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﺃﻭل ﻨﻭﻓﻤﺒﺭ 1954؟
# (5ه" ا "م ا /ي -دف ر* )#دك ؟
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺒﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﻗﻭﻯ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﺨﺭ
ﻨﻬﺩﻑ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ،ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، nﺒﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ 2nﻋﻠﻰ . 5
.1ﻭﻀﻊ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺩﻭل
ﺃﺤﺠﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ Aﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ 0ﺇﻝﻰ . 27ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ B 2ﺃﺤﺠﺯ
= 2A 2ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺤﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻷﺴﻔل ﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩﻫﺎ .ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ C 2ﺃﺤﺠﺯ
) = MOD ( B 2;5ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺤﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻷﺴﻔل ﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩﻫﺎ.
ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟ ﻀﻊ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ.
.2ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ
]. 24 ≡ ... [5 و ]23 ≡ ... [5 ، ]22 ≡ ... [5 ، ]21 ≡ ... [5 ﺃﻨﻘل ﺜﻡ ﺃﺘﻤﻡ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ: •
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 2nﻋﻠﻰ 5ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل . 1 ≤ n ≤ 4 •
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ 24 k ≡ 1 [5] ، kﺜﻡ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺨﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺃ ﺃﺘﻤﻡ ) ﺒﻌﺩ ﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ ( ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ: •
]. 24 k +3 ≡ ... [5 ، ]24 k + 2 ≡ ... [5 ، ]24 k +1 ≡ ... [5
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 2nﻋﻠﻰ 5ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ n = 4k + 2 ، n = 4k + 1 ، n = 4kﻭ n = 4k + 3؟ •
.3ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﻜل ﻤﻥ 21428ﻭ 22007ﻋﻠﻰ . 5 •
ﻋﻠﻰ . 5 2 × 250 − 3 × 22000 + 283 ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ •
ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ] 2007 ≡ 2 [5ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 2007 2008ﻋﻠﻰ . 5 •
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﻴﻘﺒل 3 ×122002 − 3 × 2007 2000 + 2 × 422003ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . 5 •
19
ﻤﻭﻀﻭﻉ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻗﻭﺍﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . 6
%* .2ا?
اد ا> n
,*,ا -ن %#أ
3 ! ( n − 4 ) @Aد . 6
.3ﻋﻴﻥ ا?
اد ا> n
,*,ا -ن %#أ
3 ! ( n + 2 ) @Aد . 6
n +2
= .a .4ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﻁﻕ aﺤﻴﺙ
n −4
6
.a = 1+ • ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺼﺤﻴﺢ nﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ، 4
n −4
• ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ nﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ aﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎ.
n −4
= .b .5ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﻁﻕ bﺤﻴﺙ
n +2
6
.b = 1− • ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺼﺤﻴﺢ nﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ، 2
n +2
• ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ nﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ bﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎ.
3 6
3 B! ( n + 2 ) (3أن ) - ( n + 2إ D 6
n +2 −6 −3 −2 −1 1 2 3 6
. n = n ′ − 2 3 n + 2 = n ′ -
n −8 −5 −4 −3 −1 0 1 4
20
ﻤﻭﻀﻭﻉ ﻤﻊ ﺇﺭﺸﺎﺩﺍﺕ
ﻴﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻹﺤﺩﻯ ﺍﻝﺒﻨﻭﻙ ﻤﻥ 15ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ،ﻤﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻴﻤﻴﻥ ،ﻴﺘﻡ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩﻫﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻜل
ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻙ ﻭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻫﻭ ﺇﻤﺎ 1ﻭ ﺇﻤﺎ 2ﺤﺴﺏ ﺠﻨﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﺭﻙ. •
ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺨﻴﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺴﻨﺔ ﻤﻴﻼﺩﻩ. •
ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﺎﻥ ﻴﻌﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺸﻬﺭ ﻤﻴﻼﺩﻩ. •
ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ ﺭﻤﺯ ﻭﻻﻴﺔ ﺇﻗﺎﻤﺘﻪ. •
ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﺴﺘﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺒﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻔﻪ ﺍﻝﻭﻁﻨﻴﺔ. •
ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺨﻴﺭﺍﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ) ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﻭل ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺎ (. •
ﻴﺘﻡ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ) ﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺍﻗﺒﺔ ( ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
ﺍﻝﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﻭ 97 − rﺤﻴﺙ rﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ . 97
.1ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺼﺤﺔ ﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺹ ﺒﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ . 2 85 05 33 565 001 89
.2ﺃﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺠﺭﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺴﺤﺏ ﺘﻡ ﺤﺠﺯ ﺨﻁﺄ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ) 2 85 05 33 569 001 89ﺨﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﺸﺭ (.
ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻜﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﺨﻁﺄ.
.3ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Bﺭﻗﻡ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Aﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ) Bﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ(.
• ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ Aﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل H ×106 + Lﺤﻴﺙ . ( B = 2 85 05 33 565 001 89 ) 0 ≤ L < 106
• ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ] 106 ≡ 27 [97ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ Aﻭ 27H + Lﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . 97
• ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺼﺤﺔ ﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺹ ﺒﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ . 2 85 05 33 565 001 89
• ﺃﺫﻜﺭ ﻤﺜﺎﻻ ﻝﺨﻁﺄ ﻻ ﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻝﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻜﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺠﻭﺩﻩ.
ﺇﺭﺸﺎﺩﺍﺕ
ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻤﺜل . casio 89
.2ﺍﻝﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﻭ . 66
ﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ Hﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺠﺯﺃﻴﻬﻤﺎ Lﻭ L ′
ﻨﺫﻜﺭ ﻋل ﺴﺒﻴل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﺎل ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ 2 85 05 33 565 001 89ﻭ . 2 85 05 33 565 098 89
21
10ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ,ر
.(%-, .
x − 5ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . 11 1ـ (23ا. ℤ 0 (1
11ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ nﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 1ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ
2n + 3ﻴﻘﺴﻡ . 6 ﻗﺎﺴﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . 204
12ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺎﺕ ) ( a , bﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ .12 ، 11 ، 10 ، 9 ، 8 ، 7 ، 6 ، 5 ، 4 ، 3 ، 2
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ . ab = 39 2ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ
ﺍﺸﺭﺡ ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ a + bﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺯﻭﺠﻲ . ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . 17
13ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺎﺕ ) ( x ; yﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ . 254 ، 119 ، 86 ، 51 ، 27 ، 17 ، 1 ، 0
ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ . x 2 − y 2 = 15 .1 3ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 3؟
14ﺃ ـ ﺃﻨﺸﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ). ( x − 2 )( y − 3 103؛ 206؛ 111؛ . 94
ﺏ ـ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺎﺕ ) ( x ; yﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ .2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 9؟
ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ . xy = 3x + 2 y : 205؛ 628؛ 525؛ . 324
(1 15ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ aﺒﺤﻴﺙ 7 .3ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 2ﻭ 3؟
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺴﻤﺎ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ aﻭ . a < 50 205؛ 315؛ 261؛ . 528
33 .4ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 2ﻭ 9؟
،ﻤﻘﺎﻡ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ (2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻜﺴﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ِـ
21 228؛ 432؛ 357؛ . 422
ﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ . 50 ﻥ a − bﻴﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 9ﻭ a + bﻴﻘﺒل
4ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃ
2ـ ا (1ا. ℤ 0 (
235 ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 11ﺤﻴﺙ :
16ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ aﻋﻠﻰ bﻓﻲ ﻜل أ ـ a = 73ﻭ . b = 37
ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : ب ـ a = 86ﻭ . b = 68
أ ـ a = 118ﻭ . b = 5 4ـ ـ a = 32ﻭ . b = 23
ب ـ a = 152ﻭ . b = 7 5ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻭﺍﻤل ﺃﻭﻝﻴﺔ .
Aـ ـ a = −118ﻭ . b = 5 . 144 ، 51 ، 46 ، 24 ، 18
د ـ a = −152ﻭ . b = 7 6ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 35ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻭﺍﻤل ﺃﻭﻝﻴﺔ ،
17ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ nﺍﻷﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﻥ 100ﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺘﺤﻠﻴﻼ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻭﺍﻤل ﺃﻭﻝﻴﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ 41ﻫﻭ . 5 ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ 352 ، 7 × 35 :ﻭ . 353
18ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a = 13 × 21 + 16ﻓﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ a 7ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﻭﺍﺴﻡ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ 21؟ ﻭﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ aﻋﻠﻰ . 13 ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ 24 ، 20 :ﻭ . 75
x 19ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ 23ﻫﻭ 1ﻭﺒﺎﻗﻲ .1 8ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻘﻭﺍﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . 45
ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ 17ﻫﻭ . 13 .2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻘﻭﺍﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺠﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . 90
ﻥ ﺤﺎﺼﻠﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ 23ﻭ 17ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺎﻥ .
ﻋﻴﻥ xﻋﻠﻤ ﹼﺎ ﺃ .3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻘﻭﺍﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 90ﻭﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ
20ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ aﻋﻠﻰ 12ﻫﻭ . 8 ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . 5
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ aﻋﻠﻰ 6؟ ﻋﻠﻰ 4؟ ﻋﻠﻰ 3؟ 9ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ nﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ
ﻋﻠﻰ 2؟ n + 3ﻴﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . 7
22
21ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 524ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ
x 31ﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ،ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ 7ﻫﻭ . 2
ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ bﻫﻭ rﻭﺤﺎﺼل ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻫﻭ . 15
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 7ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ bﻭ r؟
x + 5؛ x − 5؛ 9x؛ −15x؛ x 3
22ﺤﺎﺼﻼ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ aﻋﻠﻰ ﻜل ﻤﻥ 155
32ﻨﻀﻊ a ≡ 30757 [10] :؛ ]b ≡ 15163 [10
ﻭ 161ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺎﻥ ﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺒﺎﻗﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺘﻴﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ
ﻭ ]. c ≡ 12924 [10
65ﻭ . 23ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . a
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ b ، aﻭ cﻋﻠﻰ . 10 23ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ aﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 10ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ bﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ 13ﻭﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻫﻭ . 22
ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ . ﻥ . a − b = 538
ﻋﻴﻥ aﻭ bﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃ
ب ـ a −b +c؛ أ ـ a +b +c؛ 24ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺎﺕ ) ( x ; yﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ
د ـ abc؛ Aـ ـ a + b − c؛ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ . 351 = 71x + y
و ـ .a +b +c
2 2 2
هـ ـ ab + ac + bc؛ 3ـ اات . ℤ 0
# 33ه
ا
3د . 11 67 25ﺒﺭﺭ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ا!
Q--ا
3د . 11 6713
ب ـ ]. 152 ≡ 2 [3 أ ـ ] . 45 ≡ 3 [ 7
ن . 62008 ≡ 1[ 7 ] :
%ّ* 34أ ّ
د ـ ]. 137 ≡ −3 [5 Aـ ـ ]. 29 ≡ −1[ 6
ن ا
3د KT 82008 − 62008ا. 7
T
ا! Q--أ ّ
هـ ـ ]. −17 ≡ −7 [10 و ـ ]. −13 ≡ 2 [5
4ـ ا<=<ل ا. 9:
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ) (1ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ]37 ≡ x [ 4
35ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ، n
.1 26ﻋﻴﻥ ﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ xﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ).(1
)n ( n + 1
= . 1 + 2 + 3 + ... + n .2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﺼﻐﺭ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ 4ﻭﻴﺤﻘﻕ ) (1؟
2
36ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ : 27ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ nﺍﻷﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﻥ 30ﺤﻴﺙ :
)n ( n + 1)( 2n + 1 ]. n ≡ 4 [7
= . 02 + 12 + 22 + ... + n 2
6 n 28ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 2
37ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ : ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ،ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ n
)n 2 ( n + 1 ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ .
2
= . 1 + 2 + 3 + ... + n
3 3 3
4 أ ـ ] 46 ≡ 0 [ n؛
38ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ِـ u 0 = 0 : ب ـ ] 10 ≡ 1[ n؛
ﻭ . u n +1 = 2u n + 1 Aـ ـ ] . 27 ≡ 5 [ n
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ : 29ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻓﻘﺎﺕ
. u n = 2 −1
n
ﺒﺘﺭﺩﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺤﻴﺙ . n ≥ 2
n 39ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ . 1 a = 13n + 4؛ b = −5n + 14ﻭ . c = 111n − 34
aﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ ] . a ≡ b [ n 5ـ 8اص اات . ℤ 0
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ، p n 30ﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻴﺤﻘﻕ ] ، n ≡ 140 [12ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ
. a ≡b
p p
] [n ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ nﻋﻠﻰ . 12
23
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ، m + n ,.ر
@ّ2 .ـّ>.
m × nﻭ m 2ﻋﻠﻰ . 17 1ـ (23ا. ℤ 0 (1
48ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ nﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ 40ﺒﻌﺩﺍ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻀﻴﺔ ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻫﻤﺎ 156 m
ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ 43ﻤﺴﺎﻭﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺼل . ﻭ . 90 m
49ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ،ﻋﻴﻥ ﺤﺎﺼل ﻗﺴﻤﺔ
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ aﻋﻠﻰ bﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺼﺭ aﺒﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . b
ﺃ ـ a = 2008ﻭ . b = 21
ﺏ ـ a = −3475ﻭ . b = 53
50ﺃﻋﻁ ﺤﺼﺭﺍ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 326ﺒﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ﻴﺭﺍﺩ ﺇﺤﺎﻁﺘﻬﺎ ﺒﺴﻴﺎﺝ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﺒﺄﻭﺘﺎﺩ )ﺃﻋﻤﺩﺓ( ﺤﺩﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ
. 27ﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺼﺭﻩ ﺒﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . 12 ﻜل ﺍﺜﻨﻴﻥ ﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ؛ ﻭﻏﺭﺱ ﻭﺘﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ .
3ـ اات ℤ 0و8اA ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻜل ﻭﺘﺩﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﻴﻥ ،ﻫﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ
51ﻜﻡ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺘﺸﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ : ﻤﻘﺩﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺘﺭ ،ﺃﻗل ﻤﻥ 5 mﻭﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ . 2 m
ﺃ ـ ﺒﻌﺩ 112ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺸﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ ؟ ـ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺘﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻏﺭﺴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺤﻴﻁ
ﺏ ـ ﻗﺒل 153ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺸﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ ؟ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻀﻴﺔ .
)ﻤﻊ ﺫﻜﺭ ﺼﺒﺎﺤﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻤﺴﺎﺀ( (1 41ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻭﺍﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 8ﺜﻡ ﻋﺩﺩ
52ﺍﻝﻤﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺘﻅﻡ ، ABCDEﻤﺤﻴﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ . C ﺍﻝﻘﻭﺍﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . 9
A C Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺘﺤﺭﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ، (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻘﻭﺍﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . 8 × 9
E ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ . A (1 42ﻜﻴﻑ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ
B
n +2
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺴﻬﻡ . ﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎ .
C n −1
D ﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻭﺼﻭل ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻓﻲ ﻜل
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ aﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻗﻭﺍﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ a
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ :
ﻗﺎﺴﻤﻴﻥ ﺃﻭﻝﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻫﻤﺎ 2ﻭ ، 3ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﻗﻭﺍﺴﻡ a 2ﻫﻭ
ﺃ ـ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﻘﻁﻊ 15123ﻗﻭﺴﺎ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ
ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻗﻭﺍﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . a
ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ .
43ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺎﺕ ) ( x ; yﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ
ﺏ ـ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﻘﻁﻊ 15132ﻗﻭﺴﺎ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ
ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ . xy − 4 y − 12 = 0
ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ .
2ـ ا (1ا. ℤ 0 (
235
53ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 121527ﻋﻠﻰ . 5
54ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 5ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ : 44ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 71ﻋﻠﻰ 72؟
55ﺠﺩ ﺒﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 9ﻝﻸﻋﺩﺍﺩ : ﻜل ﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺘﺤﻤل 34ﺴﻁﺭﺍ ﻤﺎﻋﺩﺍ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﺨﻴﺭﺓ ﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ.
34572457 ، 175412ﻭ . 3752009 ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺴﻁﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﺨﻴﺭﺓ ؟
56ﺒﺭﺭ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ، n 46ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ kﺤﻴﺙ
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ 7254n ≡ 0 [9] :؛ ] 3532n ≡ 0 [ 2؛ . 100100 = 13k + 35ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 100100ﻋﻠﻰ . 13
47ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻴﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ mﻭ n
] 1785n ≡ 0 [5؛ ]. 51502n ≡ 0 [11
ﻋﻠﻰ 17ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ 8ﻭ . 12
24
ﻥ ) n ( n 2 − 1ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ِـ . 6
ب ـ ﺒﺭﺭ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺃ 57ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 3286374ﻋﻠﻰ . 10
.3ﺃﻤﻠﺊ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ : 58ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، nﻴﻜﻭﻥ
ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ] . 32 n − 2n ≡ 0 [ 7
nﻋﻠﻰ 6 ( )
n 2 − 1 n n 2 − 1ﻋﻠﻰ n + 1ﻋﻠﻰ n − 1ﻋﻠﻰ
59ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻴﻜﻭﻥ :
6 6 6 ﻋﻠﻰ 6
0 ... ... ... ... 33n + 2 + 2n + 4 ≡ 0 [5] (1
1 ... ... ... ... 33n +1 + 2n +1 (2ﻴﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . 5
2 ... ... ... ...
25 n +1 + 3n +3 (3ﻴﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . 29
3 2 4 2 0
4 ... ... ... ... n 60ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ .
5 ... ... ... ... ﺠﺩ ،ﺘﺒﻌﺎ ﻝﻘﻴﻡ ، nﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ n 2ﻋﻠﻰ . 4
.4ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺎﺠﻪ ؟
61ﺃ ـ xﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ .ﺃﺘﻤﻡ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ :
]x ≡ 0 1 2 3 4 [ 5
4ـ ,ا2ت .
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 65ﺇﻝﻰ 69ﻨﻀﻊ }A = {0 , 1, 2 ,..., 27 ≡ 2x ][ 5
ﻭﻨﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ: ﺏ ـ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ xﺤﻴﺙ
ﺽﺹﺵ ﺱ ﺯ ﺭ ﺫ ﺩ ﺥ ﺡ ﺝ ﺙ ﺕ ﺏ ﺃ ]. 2 x ≡ 3 [ 5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
62أ ـ ﺠﺩ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 45ﻋﻠﻰ . 11
ﻱ ﻭ ﻩ ﻥ ﻡ ل ﻙ ﻕ ﻑ ﻍ ﻉ ﻅ ﻁ ب ـ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 11ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ :
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 375 k؛ 375 k +1؛ 375 k + 2؛ 375 k +3ﻭ 375 k + 4ﻤﻊ
65ﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴل x ֏ yﺤﻴﺙ
. k ∈ℕ
yﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ x + 3ﻋﻠﻰ . 28
.1 63أ ـ ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 1999ﻋﻠﻰ 7؟
(1ﺸﻔﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻤﺔ " ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺍﺌﺭ"
ب ـ ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 2007ﻋﻠﻰ 7؟
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل yﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ Aﻴﻭﺠﺩ x
.2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺤﻴﺙ ] . n ≡ 5 [ 7
ﻭﺤﻴﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ Aﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ yﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ
أ ـ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ n 3ﻋﻠﻰ . 7
x + 3ﻋﻠﻰ . 28
ﻥ ]. n 3 + 1 ≡ 0 [7
ب ـ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃ
(3ﺤل ﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
m .3ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺤﻴﺙ ] . m ≡ 4 [ 7
ﺘﺒﻀل ؛ ﻝﺜﻐﻭﺍ ﺜﻬﺼﺎﺸﺜﺙ ؛ ﻭﺫﻭﺯ .
ﻥ ]. m 3 − 1 ≡ 0 [7
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃ
66ﻝﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ ﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻨﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻝﻠﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ Aﻓﻲ
ﻥ 19993 + 20073ﻴﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ
.4ﺒﻴﻥ ،ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ،ﺃ
ﻨﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺤﻴﺙ ) f ( xﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 15x + 2ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻋﻠﻰ . 7
، 28ﻤﻊ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ xﻫﻭ ﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ
64ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻫﻭ ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻨﹼﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ
ﻭ ) f ( xﻫﻭ ﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ .
ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ، nﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ) A = n ( n 2 − 1ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . 6
ﻨﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﻤﺠﺩﻭل ﺇﻜﺴﺎل ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺩﺓ :ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻤﻥ A 2
.1ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ Aﺜﻡ
ﺇﻝﻰ A 29ﻨﺴﺠل ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻭﻑ ﻭﺃﻤﺎﻤﻬﺎ ﻤﻥ B 2ﺇﻝﻰ B 29ﻨﺴﺠل
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ n = 5 : 6؛ n = 16؛ . n = 32
ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ . Aﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ C 2ﻨﺤﺠﺯ ﺍﻝﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ
ﻥ ]. n ≡ 5 [ 6
.2ﻨﻔﺘﺭﺽ ﺃ
؛ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ D 2ﻨﺤﺠﺯ ﺍﻝﻭﻅﻴﻔﺔ
أ ـ ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ n 2ﻋﻠﻰ . 6
25
73ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻊ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، n ؛ ﺜﻡ ﻨﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻌ ﹰﺎ
23n − 1ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . 7 ﻭﻨﺴﺤﺒﻬﻤﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻏﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻑ . 29
74ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻊ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، n أ ـ ﺸﻔﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻤﺔ " ﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ".
32 n − 1ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . 8 ب ـ ﺤل ﺍﻝﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ ﻝﻠﻜﻠﻤﺔ " ﻋﺭﺘﻨﺎﻫﻁﺕ ".
75ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻊ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺃﻜﺒﺭ 67ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻝﻠﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ Aﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺤﻴﺙ ) f ( x
ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 5n ≥ 4n + 3n ، 2 ﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 14x + 3ﻋﻠﻰ . 28
(1 76ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ (1ﺸﻔﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻤﺔ " ﺴﻜﺭ " .ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻁﺭﻭﺡ ؟
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ aﻭ bﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ، A
ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 3n 2 ≥ ( n + 1) ، 2
2
ﻥ ]. a − b ≡ 0 [ 2
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) ، f ( a ) = f (bﻓﺈ
(2ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ) ( Pnﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ . " 3n ≥ 2n + 5n 2 " :
(3ﺍﺸﺭﺡ ﻜﻴﻑ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ
ﺃ ـ ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ nﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻥ
ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺤل ﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ،ﻤﻤﻜﻨﺎ ؟
ﺃﺠﻠﻪ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ Pnﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ؟
68ﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺤﻴﺙ ) f ( xﻫﻭ
ﺏ ـ ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ
ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 11x + 6ﻋﻠﻰ . 28
ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، 5ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ Pnﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ .
(1ﺸﻔﺭ ﻜﻠﻤﺔ " ﺘﻠﻤﺴﺎﻥ " .
(u n ) 77ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ِـ u 0 = 3ﻭﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ (2ﺤل ﺘﺸﻔﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ :ﺸﺒﻜﺨﻎ ؛ ﻫﻐﺨﻌﺏ .
ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . u n +1 = 4 − u n ، n x 69ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ Aﻭ yﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ u 4 ، u 3 ، u 2 ، u 1ﻭ . u 5ﺃﻋﻁ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 7 x + 5ﻋﻠﻰ . 28
u nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴل x ֏ yﺸﻔﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻤل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻴﺔ :
(2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻊ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، n ﺁﺩﺍﺏ ﻭﻓﻠﺴﻔﺔ ؛ ﺁﺩﺍﺏ ﻭﻝﻐﺎﺕ ﺃﺠﻨﺒﻴﺔ ؛ ﻋﻠﻭﻡ ﺘﺠﺭﻴﺒﻴﺔ .
u 2 n = 3ﻭ . u 2 n +1 = 1 5ـ ا<=<ل ا. 9:
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ nﻨﻀﻊ ، (u n ) 70ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ِ ℕـ u 0 = 3ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل
). s n = 1 + 3 + 5 + ... + ( 2n − 1 ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . u n +1 = 6 + u n ، n
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ s 3 ، s 2 ، s1ﻭ . s 4ﺃﻋﻁ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ s n ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ .
ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
71ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ِـ u 0 = 0,5
(2ﻻﺤﻅ s nﻫﻭ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ
ﻭ ) . u n +1 = (u n
2
26
(3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، nﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 79ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ِـ u 2 = 3 ، u 1 = 1ﻭﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل
24 n +3 + 17 4 n + 2 + 3ﻴﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 5 ﻜل ∗. u n + 2 = 2u n +1 − u n ، n ∈ ℕ
(1 84ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 43ﻋﻠﻰ . 11 ﺃ ـ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ u 4 ، u 3ﻭ . u 5ﺃﻋﻁ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ u n
(2ﻋ ﻴﻥ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺒﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 4nﻋﻠﻰ . 11 ﺏ ـ ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ .
(3ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﹼﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ 43n − 153n + 22 ، n .1 80ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﹼﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n 2 − n ، n
ﻴﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 11 ﻴﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . 2
(2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ) (19953n +1 + 2612 n + 2 + 7ﻋﻠﻰ 11؟ .2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﹼﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n ( n 2 − 1) ، n
85ﻓﻲ ﻨﻅﺎﻡ ﺘﺤﻘﹼﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻀﺎﺌﻊ ﺘﻭﻀﻊ ﻝﺼﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . 6
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﻤﻴﺯ ﺒﺎﻷﻋﻤﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﻋﻠﻰ 12
1.ـCـ.B
ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﻤﺘﺒﻭﻉ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﻋﺸﺭ ﻭﻫﻭ
81ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، nﻨﻀﻊ rnﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ
ﺍﻝﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ .
ﺍﻷﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 2nﻋﻠﻰ . 9
ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﻌﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﻤﻴﺯ ﺒﺎﻷﻋﻤﺩﺓ :
C 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 C 5 C 6 C 7 C 8 C 9 C 10 C 11 C 12 n (1ﺃﺘﻤﻡ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ0 1 2 3 4 5 6 :
R
ﺤﻴﺙ Rﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ؛ C 12 ، ... ، C 2 ، C 1ه أرم rn
ا [*#'-وه أ
اد >,#
*3*KZرة * 0 %و . 9 (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ rnﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . n
,
('3ا>* ،
Tﻴﺤﺴﺏ ا)-ح Rﺒﺎﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : (3ﻋﻴﻥ ،ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، nﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ
]3S i + S p + R ≡ 0 [10 ﺍﻷﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 65nﻋﻠﻰ . 9
ﺤﻴﺙ ، S i = C 1 + C 3 + C 5 + C 7 + C 9 + C 11 (4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 652011ﻋﻠﻰ . 9
. S p = C 2 + C 4 + C 6 + C 8 + C 10 + C 12 82ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺒﻴﺭ ﻋﻥ u nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
.1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻠﺼﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ، C 1 = 0 ، R = 4 : ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ِـ u 0 = 7ﻭﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ
... C 2 = 1ﺇﻝﺦ . . u n +1 = 10u n − 18 ، n
ﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﻤﻴﺯ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻠﺼﻴﻘﺔ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ .
ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃ
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ u 4 ، u 3 ، u 2 ، u1ﻭ . u 5
.2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻕ ﻝﻠﺘﺭﻤﻴﺯ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ :
ﻻﺤﻅ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺘﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺴﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﺼﻔﺎﺭ ؛
R 5 1 6 0 3 2 4 2 1 5 3 7
ﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﻤﻴﺯﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﻴﻥ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ :
.3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃ ﺃﻋﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺼﻔﺎﺭ ﻭ . n
R a 7 b 0 4 1 5 6 3 6 6 2 (2ﺃﻋﻁ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ u nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ، nﺜﻡ ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻊ
R b 7 a 0 4 1 5 6 3 6 6 2 ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ .
.4ﻋﻴﻥ cﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﻤﻴﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﺼﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎ. (1 83ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 5ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 2kﻤﻥ
8 3 9 9 4 2 c 2 0 0 3 4 1 ﺃﺠل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 8ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . k
.5ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻠﺼﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﺴﺘﺒﺩل ﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﺒﺤﺭﻓﻴﻥ dﻭ . e
(2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، nﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻝﻠﻘﺴﻤﺔ
1 d e 9 3 6 7 3 5 8 0 2 1
ﻥ . e ≡ −3b − 1[10] :
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃ ﺍﻷﻗﻠﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 24 nﻋﻠﻰ 5ﻫﻭ . 1
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝﻠﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) . (e ; d ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ 17 4 nﻋﻠﻰ . 5
27
ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺩﺩ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ a = 9720 88 ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺭﺍﺡ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ . 86
ﻤﻴﺯ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﻤل ﺍﻝﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻝﺠﻤل ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻁﺌﺔ . ] . 136 ≡ 36 [ 7 (1أ ـ
(1ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ aﻴﻘﺒل ﺘﺤﻠﻴﻼ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻭﺍﻤل ﺃﻭﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل : ب ـ ]. −136 ≡ −60 [9
. 23 × 33 × 5 × 9 :ـ ـ ]. 2008 ≡ 608 [100
(2ﻋﺩﺩ ﻗﻭﺍﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ aﻫﻭ . 40 د ـ ] . 17 ≡ 0 [ −17
(5ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 1ﻫﻭ ﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ aﻋﻠﻰ . 5 :ـ ـ ]. 121 ≡ − 1[3
28
ﺍﻝﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻬﺩﻓﺔ
ﺍﻝﺘﻤﻴﻴﺯ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ.
ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻊ.
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻊ.
ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ.
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻝﺤل ﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻤﻴﺔ.
ﺤﺩﺍ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل.u n +1 = au n + b : ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ n ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﻭ
ﻭﻝﺩ ﻜﺎﺭل ﻓﺭﻴﺩﻴﺭﻴﻙ ﻏﻭﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﺒﺭﻭﻨﺸﻔﺎﻴﻎ ﻋﺎﻡ 1777ﻡ ﻭﺘﻭﻓﻰ ﻋﺎﻡ 1855ﻡ.
ﻋﺎﺵ ﺒﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﻏﻭﺘﻨﻐﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻕ ﺒﺠﺎﻤﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﻝﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺴﻨﺔ 1807ﻡ ﺃﺴﺘﺎﺫﹰﺍ ﻭﻤﺩﻴﺭﹰﺍ ﻝﻤﺭﺼﺩﻫﺎ.
ﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻭﺹ ﻤﻌﺭﻭﻓ ﹰﺎ ﻷﺒﺤﺎﺜﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻤﻴﺯﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺤﻘﻭل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻝﻔﻴﺯﻴﺎﺀ ﻭﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻔﻠﻙ ﻭﻋﻠﻡ
ﻗﻴﺎﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻡ ﻓﻴﺯﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ،ﻭﻤﺎﺯﺍل ﻴﻌﻭﺩ ﻝﻪ ﺍﻝﻔﻀل ﺍﻝﻜﺒﻴﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ
ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻀﺭ.
ﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻭﺹ ﻋﺒﻘﺭﻴﺎ ﻤﻨﺫ ﺼﻐﺭﻩ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺘﻌﻠﻡ ﺒﻤﻔﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺍﺀﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﺭﻩ ﺜﻼﺙ ﺴﻨﻭﺍﺕ ﻜﻤﺎ
ﺃﻨﻪ ﺃﺒﻬﺭ ﻤﺒﻜﺭﺍ ﺃﺴﺎﺘﺫﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻴﺤﻜﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﺴﺎﺘﺫﺓ ،ﺒﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﺭﺍﺤﺔ ،ﻜﻠﻑ ﺘﻼﻤﺫﺘﻪ ﺍﻝﺫﻴﻥ
ﻜﺎﺭل ﻓﺭﻴﺩﻴﺭﻴﻙ ﻏﻭﺹ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﻡ ﻏﻭﺹ ﻭ ﻋﻤﺭﻩ ﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺴﻨﻭﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺒﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﻗﺘﺭﺡ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 100ﺇﻻ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻝﺤﻅﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻗﺩﻡ ﻝﻪ ﻏﻭﺹ ﺍﻝﺤل ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ 1777 .ﻡ – 1855ﻡ
1 + 2 + .......... + 99 + 100
ﻜﺘﺏ ﻏﻭﺹ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻤﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻭﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﺈﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﻴﻥ
100 + 99 + .......... + 2 + 1
ﻻﺤﻅ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺒﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﻋﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎ ﻴﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ 101ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ:
100 + 1 = 101 ، ... ، 3 + 98 = 101 ، 2 + 99 = 101 ، 1 + 100 = 101ﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻤﺎﺌﺔ ﻤﺭﺓ.
100 ×101
= . 1 + 2 + ... + 100 ﺘﻭﺼل ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺃﻥ 2 (1 + 2 + ... + 100 ) = 100 ×101ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ = 5050
2
• ﺒﺈﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ . 1000
29
ا ط أول
.1ﺇﻝﻴﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ " ﻤﻨﻁﻘﻴﺔ " ) : (u n
... ، u 4 = 47 ، u 3 = 23 ، u 2 = 11 ، u1 = 5 ، u 0 = 2
ﺃﻨﻘل ﺜﻡ ﺃﺘﻤﻡ "" :ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺤﺩ ﺒﺎﻝﻀﺭﺏ ﻓﻲ ...ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻪ ﺜﻡ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ "" ... •
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﻥ u 6ﻭ . u 8 •
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، nﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ u n +1ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . u n •
.2ﺇﻝﻴﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ " ﻤﻨﻁﻘﻴﺔ " ) : (v n
... ،v 4 = 7 ، v 3 = 4 ، v 2 = 1 ، v 1 = −2 ، v 0 = −5
ﺃﻨﻘل ﺜﻡ ﺃﺘﻤﻡ "" :ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺤﺩ ﺒﻀﺭﺏ ﺩﻝﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ...ﺜﻡ ﻁﺭﺡ "" ... •
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، nﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ v nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n •
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﻥ v 2007ﻭ .v 1428 •
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، nﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ v n +1ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ .v n •
.3ﺇﻝﻴﻙ ،ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻤﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ " ﻤﻨﻁﻘﻴﺔ ":
ﺠـ( −2؛ −5؛ −11؛ −23؛ ﺏ( 2؛ 4؛ 8؛ 16؛ ﺃ( −3؛ −5؛ −7؛ −9؛
ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﺡ.
ا
ط ا
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ) (u nﻭ ) (v nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ nﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
.v n +1 = 0,5v n ﻭ v 1 = 8ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ u n = 2 ( n + 1) ، n
.1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل.
.2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (v n؟ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ v nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
.3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﻴﻥ S n = u 1 + u 2 + ... + u nﻭ . S n′ = v 1 + v 2 + ... + v n
.4ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻜﺴﺎل ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ) (u nﻭ ) (v nﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ:
.5ﻀﻊ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﻭل ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ) (u nﻭ ) . (v nﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﻙ.
30
ا
ط ا
ﻴﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ Aﺒﹻ 130ﻨﺴﻤﺔ ﻜل ﺴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺤﻴﻥ ﻴﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ Bﺒﻨﺴﺒﺔ 2 %ﻤﻥ ﺴﻨﺔ
ﺇﻝﻰ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ .ﻓﻲ ﺴﻨﺔ 2005ﺒﻠﻎ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻜل ﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ 6000 Bﻨﺴﻤﺔ.
.1ﻨﻤﺫﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﹻ u nﺇﻝﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ Aﻭ ﺒﹻ v nﺇﻝﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ Bﺨﻼل ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ . 2005 + n
ﻋﻴﻥ u 0ﻭ v 0ﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ u 1ﻭ .v 1 •
ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ u n +1ﻭ . u nﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . r •
ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ u nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n •
ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ v n +1ﻭ .v nﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (v nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . q •
ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ v nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n •
ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻋﺩﺩﻱ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻓﻲ ﺴﻨﺔ . 2010 •
.2ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺠﺩﻭل ﺃﻭ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺤﺠﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ) (u nﻭ ) (v nﻭ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ) ( menu RECURﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ •
ﻝﻠﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ Casioﻭ ) ( mod e Seqﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ .Ti
ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﺠﺩﻭﻝﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل. •
ﺍﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺴﻨﺔ ﻴﻔﻭﻕ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ Bﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ A؟ •
ا
ط اا
ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭل ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ 2000ﺃﻭﺩﻉ ﻨﺒﻴل 10 000 DAﺒﺒﻨﻙ ﻴﻘﺘﺭﺡ ﻓﺎﺌﺩﺓ ﻤﺭﻜﺒﺔ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻬﺎ 5%ﺴﻨﻭﻴﺎ .ﺒﺎﻹﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺫﻝﻙ
ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺩﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺃﻭل ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺒﻠﻎ . 2000 DA
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﹻ u nﺇﻝﻰ ﺭﺼﻴﺩ ﻨﺒﻴل ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭل ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ . 2000 + n
.1ﻋﻴﻥ u 0ﺜﻡ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ u 1ﻭ . u 2
.2ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . u n +1 = 1, 05u n + 2000 ، n
.3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ.
.4ﻨﻀﻊ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ v n = u n + 40 000 ، n
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (v nﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . 1, 05ﻋﻴﻥ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل. •
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ u nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ v nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n •
ﻜﻡ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺭﺼﻴﺩ ﻨﺒﻴل ﻓﻲ ﺴﻨﺔ 2010؟ •
.5ﻨﻀﻊ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ S n′ = v 0 + v 1 + ... + v n −1 ، nﻭ S n = u 0 + u1 + ... + u n −1
• ﺃﺤﺴﺏ S n′ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
• ﺃﺤﺴﺏ S nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﻭ S n′ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ S nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
31
↵ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ
.1ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺘﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، nﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n0ﻤﻌﻁﻰ،
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ). u ( n
ﺘﺭﻤﻴﺯ:
∗ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺒﺎﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﺒﹻ unﺒﺩﻻ ﻤﻥ ). u (n
∗ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﺒﹻ ( un )n ≥ nﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . n0
0
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℕ ( un )n∈ℕﺃﻭ ) ( un ∗ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﺒﹻ
∗ ﻴﺴﻤﻰ unﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﻭ ﻴﺴﻤﻰ un 0ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل.
∗ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ . u0
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻻﺒﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﻴﻴﺯ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﻭ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ u nﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ.
32
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :1ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . un = −3n 2 + 1 :
.1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ u2 ، u1 ، u0ﻭ . u20
.2ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ . u3n + 2 ، u2n ، un +1
ﺤل:
. u20 = −3(20) 2 + 1 = −1199 ، u2 = −3(2) 2 + 1 = −11 ، u1 = −3(1)2 + 1 = −2 ، u0 = −3(0) 2 + 1 = 1 .1
u2 n = −3(2n)2 + 1 = −12n 2 + 1 ، un +1 = −3(n + 1)2 + 1 = −3n 2 − 6n − 2 .2
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :2ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
u0 = 2ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . u n +1 = −2u n + 1 ، n
.1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . u3 ٍ ، u2 ، u1
.2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ،ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ u11 ، u10 ،ﻭ . u12
ﺤل:
، u 2 = −2u1 + 1 = −2 ( −3) + 1 = 7 ، u1 = −2u 0 + 1 = −2 × 2 + 1 = −3 .1
. u 3 = −2u 2 + 1 = −2 × 7 + 1 = −13
.2ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺘﺭﺍﺠﻌﻴﺔ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ) (TI 83 +ﻨﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺍﺤل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
] [ 2ndﺜﻡ ] [GRAPH ] [ 2ndﺜﻡ ] [W INDOW ]= [Y ] [ MODE
. u 12 = 6827 ﻭ u 11 = −3413 ، u 10 = 1707 ﻨﺤﺼل ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ:
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :3ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (v nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
v 0 = −3ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ .v n +1 = 2v n + 5 ، n
.1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ v 1ﻭ .v 2
.2ﻋﺒﺭ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ v nﻋﻥ ﻜل ﻤﻥ v n + 2ﻭ .v n −1
ﺤل:
.v 2 = 2v 1 + 5 = 2 ( −1) + 5 = 3 ﻭ v 1 = 2v 0 + 3 = 2 ( −3) + 5 = −1 .1
v n + 2 = 2v n +1 + 5 = 2 ( 2v n + 5 ) + 5 .2
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ .v n + 2 = 4v n + 15
ﻤﻥ v n +1 = 2v n + 5ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺞ ﺃﻥ v n = 2v n −1 + 5ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ 2v n −1 = v n − 5
v −5
.v n −1 = n ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
2
33
↵ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ -ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ
.1ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0ﻭ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ r ) rﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ (
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . un +1 = un + r : n
ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ :1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ) (unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ rﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﻴﻥ nﻭ ، p
.u n = u p + (n − p ) r
ﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ u n = u 0 + nr :ﻭ . u n = u1 + ( n − 1) r
ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ :2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ) (unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ:
u +u
S = u0 + u1 + ........ + un −1 + un = (n + 1) 0 n
2
ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻤﺔ:
ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل اﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﺨﻴﺭ +
ــــــــــــــــــــ × )ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ( = S
2
ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ :3ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ b ، aﻭ cﺒﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺤﺩﻭﺩﺍ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ
ﻜﺎﻥ . a + c = 2bﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ bﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ aﻭ . c
.2ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0ﻭ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ q ) qﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ (
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . un+1 = un × q : n
ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ :1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ) (unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ qﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﻴﻥ nﻭ ، p
.un = u p ×q n−p
ﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ u n = u 0 × q n :ﻭ . u n = u1 × q n −1
ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ :2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ) (unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ qﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ 1ﻓﺈﻥ:
1 − q n +1
S = u0 + u1 + ........ + un −1 + un = u0
1− q
ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻤﺔ:
1 اﻷﺴﺎﺱ ﺃﺱ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ -
ــــــــــــــــــــ × )ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل( = . S
1 - ا
س
34
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :1ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . u n = −3n + 2 :
.1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ u0ﻭ . u1
.2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . r
.3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ،ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ، nﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ . S = u 0 + u1 + ........ + u n
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺍﻝﻔﺭﻕ u n +1 − u nﻋﺩﺩ ﺜﺎﺒﺕ . r
ﺤل:
. u1 = −3(1) + 2 = −1 ﻭ u 0 = −3(0) + 2 = 2 .1
.2ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . u n +1 − u n = −3 ( n + 1) + 2 − [ −3n + 2] = −3 ، n
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . r = −3
= .S
) ( n + 1)( 4 − 3n × ) S = ( n + 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
u0 +un
× )= ( n + 1
2 − 3n + 2
.3ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
2 2 2
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل (v n ) :2ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ ℕﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل v 1 = 3ﻭ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . q = 2
.1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ v 2ﻭ ٍ .v 3
.2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ،ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ، nﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ .v n
.3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ،ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ، nﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ . S = v 1 + v 2 + ........ + v n
ﺤل:
.v 3 = v 2 × q = 6 × 2 = 12 ، v 2 = v 1 × q = 3 × 2 = 6 .1
.v n = v 1 × q n −1 = 3 × 2n −1 .2
1 − 2n 1− q n
×. S = 3
1− 2
( ( ) )
× S = v 1 + v 2 + ........ + v n = v 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ = −3 1 − 2n = 3 2n − 1
1− q
.3
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :3ﺒﻠﻎ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﻯ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺍﺌﺭﻴﺔ 3000ﻨﺴﻤﺔ ﺴﻨﺔ 2005ﻭ 3630ﻨﺴﻤﺔ ﺴﻨﺔ . 2007
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ αﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺴﻨﻭﻴﺎ ﺒﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ.
.1ﻋﻴﻥ αﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ.
.2ﻜﻡ ﺴﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﺴﻨﺔ 2030؟ ﻴﺘﻡ ﺘﺩﻭﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭﺍﺕ.
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻴﺘﻡ ﻨﻤﺫﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺩﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺒﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ αﺒﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . q = 1 + α
ﺤل :ﻝﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﹻ u nﻤﺜﻼ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ 2005 + nﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ u 0 = 3000ﻭ . u 2 = 3630
.1ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ αﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺨﻼل ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ 2005 + nﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺨﻼل ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﺔ
ﻫﻲ u n +1 = u n + αu n :ﺃﻱ . u n +1 = (1 + α ) u nﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . q = 1 + α
u2
= . q 2ﻨﺠﺩ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ q 2 = 1, 21ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ . q = 1,1ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ . α = 0,1 = 10 % ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ u 2 = u 0 × q 2ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
u0
) u 25 = 3000 × (1,1ﺃﻱ . u 25 ≈ 32504,12 .2ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ . 2030 = 2005 + 25ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ u 25 = u 0 × q 25ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
25
35
↵ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ
.1ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
ﺘﻌﺎﺭﻴﻑ (u n ) :ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℕ
.1ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ) (u nﺃﻨﻬﺎ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . u n +1 ≥ u n ، n
.2ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ) (u nﺃﻨﻬﺎ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . u n +1 ≤ u n ، n
.3ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ) (u nﺃﻨﻬﺎ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . u n +1 = u n ، n
.4ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ) (u nﺃﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺇﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ.
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ:
∗ ﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺎﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ (un ) n ≥ n 0ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺤﻴﺙ . n ≥ n 0
ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ .ﻨﻘﻭل ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻨﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﻭ ﻨﺫﻜﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺴﺒﻴل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u n ∗
n
1
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ . u n = −
2
∗ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . u n = k ، n
36
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :1ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . u n = n 2 − n :
.1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ u n +1 − u nﻤﻥ ﺍﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . n
.2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . ( un
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻻ ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ u1ﻭ u 0ﺃﻭ ﺒﻴﻥ u 3ﻭ u 2ﺃﻭ ...ﻭ ﺇﻨﻤﺎ ﻴﺠﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ
ﺒﻴﻥ u n +1ﻭ u nﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . n
ﺤل:
u n +1 − u n = ( n + 1) − ( n + 1) − ( n 2 − n ) .1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . u n +1 − u n = 2n
2
.2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ 2n ≥ 0 ، nﺃﻱ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . u n +1 − u n ≥ 0 ، n
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ.
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :2ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
1
u1 = 4ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ . u n +1 = u n − 1 ، n
2
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ.
ﺤل:
ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻴﺅﻭل ﺇﻝﻰ ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ،ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ . u n +1 ≤ u n ، n
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺤﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ :ﻨﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥu 2 ≤ u 1 :
1 1
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ u 2 = u1 − 1 = × 4 − 1 = 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . u 2 ≤ u 1
2 2
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ :ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ . u n +1 ≤ u n ، n
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ :ﻨﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ . u n + 2 ≤ u n +1
1 1 1
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ . u n +1 ≤ u nﻨﺤﺼل ﺒﻌﺩ ﻀﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻓﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ . u n +1 ≤ u nﻨﻀﻴﻑ ) ( −1ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻓﻴﻥ ﻝﻨﺠﺩ:
2 2 2
1 1
u n +1 − 1 ≤ u n − 1ﺃﻱ . u n + 2 ≤ u n +1
2 2
ﺍﻝﺨﻼﺼﺔ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ . u n +1 ≤ u n ، nﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ.
3n
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :3ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) (v nﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺒﹻ.v n = n +1 :
2
.1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (v nﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل.
.2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (v n؟
ﺤل:
1 3 3n +1 3 × 3n 3 3n 3
= v0 ﺍﻷﻭل ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ )( n
v ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻭ . = v n +1 = n + 2 = × n +1 = v n .1
2 2 2 2 × 2n +1 2 2 2
1 3
2 n
3
v 0 > 0ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (v nﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ . v n +1 − v n = ﻭ .2ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ > 1
2 2 2
37
( b ≠0 ↵ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل a ≠ 0 ) u = au + bﻭ
n+1 n
) (u nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ ℕﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u1ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ un+1 = aun + bﺤﻴﺙ a ≠ 0ﻭ . b ≠ 0
38
1
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u 0 = αﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔun +1 = un + 2 :
3
ﺃ( ﻨﻔﺭﺽ α = 3
ﺍﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ،ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ، nﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ . S = u 0 + u1 + ........ + u n
ﺏ( ﻨﻔﺭﺽ α = 2ﻭ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ. vn = un − 3 :
.1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل.
.2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ vnﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ u nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
.3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ،ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ، nﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ . S = u 0 + u1 + ........ + u n
.4ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u n؟
ﺤل:
ﺃ( α = 3ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ u 0 = 3
• ﻝﻨﺒﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻊ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . u n = 3 ، n
∗ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل n = 0ﻷﻥ . u 0 = 3
∗ ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺤﻴﺙ n ≥ 0ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ u n = 3ﻭﻨﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺼﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل . n + 1
1 1
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ u n +1 = u n + 2 = ×3 + 2 = 3ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . u n +1 = 3ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل . n + 1
3 3
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ،ﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺒﺩﺃ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻊ ،ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . nﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ.
• ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ S n = u 0 + u1 + ... + u n = ( n + 1)u 0 ، nﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ). S n = 3( n + 1
ﺏ( α = 2ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ u 0 = 2
1 1 1 1
v n +1 = u n +1 − 3 = u n + 2 − 3 = u n −1 = (u n − 3) .1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ .v n +1 = v n
3 3 3 3
1
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ = qﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل . (v 0 = u 0 − 3) v0 = −1
3
n
1
.2ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ .v n = v 0 ×q n = − : n
3
n
1
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ vn = un − 3ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . u n = v n + 3ﺇﺫﻥ . un = − + 3
3
.3ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ )S = (v 0 + 3) + (v 1 + 3) + ... + (v n + 3) = (v 0 +v 1 + ... +v n ) + (3 + 3 + ... + 3
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ) S = S ′ + 3(n + 1ﺤﻴﺙ ) S ′ = v 0 +v 1 + ... +v nﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﻫﻭ .( n + 1
n +1
1
n +1 1−
3 1 3 1
n +1
3
. S = − 1 − ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ) + 3 ( n + 1 ×)S ′ = (−1 = − 1− ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ
2 3 1−
1 2 3
3
1
n +1 1 n 1 n 1 2 1 n
. u n +1 −u n = −
.4ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ − − = − + 1 = ، n
3 3 3 3 3 3
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ u n +1 −u n > 0 ، nﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ.
39
ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻤﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ
ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭل ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ ، 2005ﺒﻠﻎ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﻯ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻥ 100 000ﻨﺴﻤﺔ.
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ ) :ﺍﻝﻔﺭﻋﺎﻥ 1ﻭ 2ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻼﻥ (
.1ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﻴﺭﺘﻔﻊ ﺴﻨﻭﻴﺎ ﺒﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ 3%ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﹻ u nﺇﻝﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭل ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ 2005 + nﺤﻴﺙ nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ u 0؟ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ u1ﻭ . u 2 •
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . u n +1 = 1, 03 × u n ، nﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . (u n •
ﻋﺒﺭ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﻋﻥ . u n •
ﻜﻡ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭل ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ 2010؟ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭل ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ 2025؟ )ﺘﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ(. •
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺴﻨﺔ ﻴﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ 200 000ﻨﺴﻤﺔ ؟ •
.2ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻭﻓﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻭ ﻨﻔﺴﻪ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻭﻻﺩﺍﺕ ﺒﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻨﻅﺭﺍ ﻝﻨﺸﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻤﻴﺯ ﻓﺈﻥ
5000ﺸﺨﺹ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﻲ ﻴﺴﺘﻘﺭﻭﻥ ﺒﻬﺎ ﺴﻨﻭﻴﺎ.
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﹻ v nﺇﻝﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭل ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ 2005 + nﺤﻴﺙ nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ.
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ v 0؟ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ v 1ﻭ .v 2 •
ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ v n +1ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ .v nﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . (v n •
ﻋﺒﺭ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﻋﻥ . u n •
ﻜﻡ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭل ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ 2010؟ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭل ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ 2025؟ )ﺘﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ(. •
ﺍﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺴﻨﺔ ﻴﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ 200 000ﻨﺴﻤﺔ ؟ •
40
ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﺜﻡ ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺘﻬﺎ
ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل:
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ِ ℕـ u 0 = 0 :ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . u n +1 = 2u n + 1 ، n
• ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ u n
.1ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﻭ ﺃﺘﻤﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﺈﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﺨﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﺃﺤﺠﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺭ 1ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀ ﻤﻥ . 0 •
ﺃﺤﺠﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ B 2ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 0ﻭ ﻫﻭ ﻴﻤﺜل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل. •
ﺃﺤﺠﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ = 2* B 2 + 1 : C 2ﻭ ﻫﻭ ﻴﻤﺜل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ. •
ﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ C 2ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺤﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻴﻤﻴﻥ. •
ﺃﺤﺠﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ B 2 + 1 : B 3ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ u n + 1ﻭ ﻝﻴﺱ . u n +1 •
ﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ B 3ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺤﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻴﻤﻴﻥ. •
41
ﻤﻭﻀﻭﻉ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
) (v nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل v 0ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻭﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . v n +1 − v n = 0, 02v n ، n
ﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (v nﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ .ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺘﹼﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ؟
.1أ ـ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃ
ب ـ ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ v nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﻭ . v 0
.2ﻨﻀﻊ . S n = v 0 + v 1 + ... + v n −1 :
أ ـ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ S nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﻭ . v 0
) ، (1, 02ﺜ ﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ . S n ≥ 50v 0 ب ـ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
35
.3ﺒﻠﻎ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺒﻠﺩ ـ 30ﻤﻠﻴﻭﻥ ﻨﺴﻤﺔ ﻴﻭﻡ 1ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ ، 2000ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻴﺭﺘﻔﻊ ﻜل ﺴﻨﺔ ﺒﻨﺴﺒﺔ . 2%
ﻜﻡ ﻴﺒﻠﻎ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺒﻠﺩ ﻴﻭﻡ 1ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ 2020؟
ﻤﻥ 1ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ 2000ﺇﻝﻰ 1ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻴﻭﻡ 1ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ 2000ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ v 0 = 30ﻤﻘﺩﺭﺍ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻠﻴﻭﻥ ﻨﺴﻤﺔ ،ﻭﻓﻲ ﻴﻭﻡ 1
) v 20 = v 0 (1, 02 ) = 30 × (1, 02 ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ 2020ﻴﻜﻭﻥ v 20ﺇﺫﻥ
20 20
2020ﺘﻭﺠﺩ 20ﺴﻨﺔ .
ﺃﻱ v 20 ≈ 44,578422ﻤﻘﺩﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻠﻴﻭﻥ ﻨﺴﻤﺔ .
42
ﻤﻭﻀﻭﻉ ﻤﻊ ﺇﺭﺸﺎﺩﺍﺕ
ب ـ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ، nﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ v nﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ u nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
ﺇﺭﺸﺎﺩﺍﺕ
ﻥ . u p + 2 ≤ u p +1
.1أ ـ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ u 1 ≤ u 0ﺜ ﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u p +1 ≤ u pﻓﺈ
ـ ـ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﺩﻴﻬﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺘﺫﻜﺭ x < aﻤﻊ a
ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ .
ب ـ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ v nﺘﻁﺒﻕ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ ﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ u nﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ .
.3أ ـ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ S nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﻴﺘ ﻡ ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ ﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ.
ب ـ ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ T nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ v n = u n + 3ﺜﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﻌﻭﻴﺽ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل
ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ . S n
43
9ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﻴﻥ : ر .
1 1 1 1 1ـ ا""ت اد
S = 1+ + +؛ + ... +
3 7 27 59049
. S = 1 + 2 + 4 + ... + 16384 1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﻤﺱ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ
1
10ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ u n = . un ﻋﻠﻰ ℕـ :ﺃ ـ
n +1
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ :
ﺏ ـ . u n +1 = 3u n + 1 u 0 = −2
1 1
ب ـ un = − n + 5؛ أ ـ u n = n + 3,5؛ 2ﺘﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ uﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕـ :
3 2
n . u ( n ) = −2n 2 + 5
د ـ .u n = − 2 !ـ ـ u n = 4 − 3n؛
5 أ ـ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﻭﺭ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺍﺩ 1 ، 0ﻭ 2ﺒﺎﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . u
11ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (v nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ب ـ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ) u ( 50 ) ، u (13ﻭ ) . u (100
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ℕﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ . v n !ـ ـ ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ u ( n + 1) nﺜ ﻡ ) u ( 2n
3ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕـ :
n
2
= vn؛ بـ أ ـ v n = 2 × 3n؛
3 u 0 = 2ﻭ . u n +1 = 3 − 2u n
2n + 2 4
. vn =− دـ vn = −؛ !ـ ـ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ u 2 ، u 1ﻭ . u 3
3n 5n
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ) u 10ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻤﺠﺩﻭل( .
3ـ اّ +ّ- ./ور' *"" .
4ﺠﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ
12ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ِ ℕـ :
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ؛ ﺜ ﻡ ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺘﺭﺒﻁ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ .
1− n 2
= . un 0؛ 5؛ 3؛ 8؛ 6؛ 11؛ ؟ ؛ 14؛ . 12 أـ
n
(1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ، u n +1 − u nﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ب ـ −2؛ 1؛ 7؛ 19؛ 43؛ 91؛ ؟ .
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . (u n
127 65 31 17 7
؛؟. ؛ ؛ ؛ ؛ !ـ ـ 2؛ 5؛
32 16 8 4 2
(2ﺃﻋﻁ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﺤﻘﻕ ) . u n = f ( nﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ
2ـ ا""ت ا)(' وا""ت ا. #$%
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل
(u n ) 5ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u 0 = 7ﻭﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ
ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ .
. −3
13ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ِ ℕـ :
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﺒﻊ ﻋﺸﺭ .
−2n 2 + 3n + 1
= . un ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ . S = u 0 + u1 + ... + u 13 :
n
(1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ، u n +1 − u nﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ (u n ) 6ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u1 = − 3ﻭﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ
2
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . (u n
. 3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﻴﻥ .
(2ﺃﻋﻁ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﺤﻘﻕ ) . u n = f ( nﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ 2
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . S = u 0 + u1 + ... + u 33
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل
ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ . ) (v nﻭ ) (w n
(u n ) 7ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . r
14ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ِ ℕـ : ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
5 ِـ v n = 3u n − 1 :ﻭ . w n = u 2 n + 3
u n = −3n 2 − 3n +
4 ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ) (v nﻭ ) (w nﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ
ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺜﻡ ﺍﻷﺴﺎﺱ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ .
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻝﻬﺎ . S = u 0 + u1 + ... + u10ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﹼﻪ 8ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ
n n
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ِ ℕـ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . u n = 2 ، n
4
= . un 2 15
n 3
44
ﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (v nﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ
أ ـ ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃ .
u n +1
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ
ﻭﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل. un
ب ـ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ v nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﺜ ﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ . u n (2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ .
ر ّ"4ـّـ.3 2n
= un 2
16ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ِ ℕـ
1ـ ا""ت ا)(' وا""ت ا. #$% n
(1ﺒﺭﺭ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ، n
51'. 22ر.
un > 0
) (v nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ v 4 = 5 :ﻭ . v 8 = 7
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ n ≥ 3ﻓﺈﻥ ، n 2 − 2n − 1 > 0
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻭﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل .v 0
u
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ v nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . nﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺤﻴﺙ : (3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ . n +1ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺍﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ
un
. v n = 50
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ .
(3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ . S = v 6 + v 7 + ... + v 94 :
17ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ
51'. 23ر.
3 ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . (u n
) (vﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل vﻭ = v 1 + v 2 + v 3 1− n
2 1 n
= un؛ أـ
v 1 + 4v 2 −v 3 = 7 2n + 1
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ v 2 ، v 1ﻭ v 2ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ. 0, 75n
= u nﺤﻴﺙ n ≥ 1؛ بـ
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ v nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n n3
ج ـ u n = n 2 + 2n + 5؛
(3ﻋﺒﺭ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ :
18ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ .
. S n = v 1 + v 2 + ... + v n
2
u n = 2؛ ب ـ ) u n = ( −3؛
n
(4ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ. S n = −10 : أـ
n + 2n + 5
51'. 24ر. ج ـ . u n = 2n − 4
) (u nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل . u 1
4ـ ا""ت * ا. u n +1 = a u n + b 012
ﻥ . u1 + u 3 = 12 :
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ u 2ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃ
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﺒﻊ u 4ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ. u 3 + u 4 + u 5 = 30 : 19ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ـ u 0 = 2 :ﻭ ﻤﻥ
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻭﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل . u 1 ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . u n +1 = 3u n − 2 ، n
(4ﺍﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ u nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﺜﻡ ﻋ ﻴﻥ nﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ : ﻨﻀﻊ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . v n = u n − 1 ، n
. u n = 32 ﺃ ـ ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ v n +1ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . v n
(5ﺍﺤﺴﺏ . S n = u 1 + u 2 + ... + u n : ﺏ ـ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (v nﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ .
51'. 25ر. (v n ) ، (u n ) 20ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ِ ℕـ :
) (u nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ
3 1
ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u 0 = 2 u n +1 = u n + ، u 0 = 1ﻭ . v n = u n + 1
2 2
ﻭﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ . u 2 + u 5 = 25 : ﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (v nﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ .
أ ـ ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃ
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ) . (u n ب ـ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ v nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﺜ ﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ . u n
(2ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ u nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n (u n ) (1 21ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ u 0 = 5 :ﻭﻤﻥ
(3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺭﺘﺒﺘﻪ . 11 ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . u n +1 = 3u n + 1 ، n
(4ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ . S = v 1 + v 2 + ... + v 10 : ﺃﺤﺴﺏ u 2 ، u 1ﻭ . u 3
51'. 26ر. (2ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (v nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
(u n )n∈ℕﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ u 0 + u 3 = 18 :
1
ﻭ u 2 + u 5 = 34 . v n = un −
2
45
2ـ اّ +ّ- ./ور' *"" . (1ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل u 0ﻭﺍﻷﺴﺎﺱ rﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ .
u 2ﻭ u 3ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u n
(1 31ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ، u 1 (2ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ u nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ِـ u 0 = 2ﻭ . u n +1 = 0,9u n − 13 (3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ :
(2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . (u n . S n = u 0 + u1 + ... + u n
32ﺃﺠﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻷﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﻤﻊ u 0 = 2 (4ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺒﺤﻴﺙ . S n = 78
ﻭ . u n +1 = 3u n − 1 51'. 27ر.
2
a 33ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻜﻴﻔﻲ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻭﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺤﺩﻭﺩﻫﺎ ) (u nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ
3
ِـ u 0 = aﻭ . u n +1 = 2,5u n − 1,5 ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ u 1 ، u 0ﻭ u 2ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 19
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ: (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ u 1 ، u 0ﻭ u 2
ﺃ ـ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a = 0ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ. (2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ u nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
ﺏ ـ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a = 1ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ. (3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ S nﺤﻴﺙ
ﺝ ـ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a = 2ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ. . S n = u 0 + u 1 + ... + u n −1
(u n ) 34ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ) S 6ﻴﻌﻁﻰ S 6ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﻜل ﻜﺴﺭ
ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ∗ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ : ﻏﻴﺭ ﻗﺎﺒل ﻝﻼﺨﺘﺯﺍل (
2 5
.u n = − n +
5 4 28ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭل ﻴﻨﺎﻴﺭ 2000ﻭﻀﻊ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ 500 DAﻓﻲ ﺒﻨﻙ
ﻥ ) (u nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃ ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻭﺍﺌﺩ ،ﺜﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭل ﻜل ﺸﻬﺭ ﺒﺎﻨﺘﻅﺎﻡ ،ﺃﻀﺎﻑ 50DA
ﺍﻷﻭل u 1ﻭ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . r ﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻓﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ . ﻨﺴﻤﻲ u 1ﺍﻝﻤﺒﻠﻎ ﻤﻘﺩﺭﺍ ﺒﺎﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭ ﻷﻭل ﺩﻓﻊ ﻭ u nﺍﻝﻤﺒﻠﻎ
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻓﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ . n
. S n = u 1 + u 2 + ... + u n (1ﺃﻜﺘﺏ u nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ . S n = 1 : (2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻀﻌﻪ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭل ﺩﻴﺴﻤﺒﺭ 2007؟
3ـ ا""ت * ا. u n +1 = a u n + b 012 (3ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺠﻤﻌﻪ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺼﻴﺩﻩ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻏﺎﻴﺔ 31
ﺩﻴﺴﻤﺒﺭ 2007؟
35ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ـ )(u n − 1
1
= . u n +1
3 29ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺒﻤﺤﻁﺔ ﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﺒﻨﺯﻴﻥ 32000 Lﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻨﺯﻴﻥ
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺤ ﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل u 0ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ . ﻴﺭﻴﺩ ﺼﺎﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻁﺔ ﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺨﻼل 10ﺃﻴﺎﻡ .
(2ﻨﻀﻊ u 0 = 4ﻭ . v n = 2u n + 1 ﺒﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻡ ﺍﻷﻭل 5000 Lﺜﻡ ﻗﺭﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻴﻨﻘﺹ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻊ ﻓﻲ
ﻜل ﻴﻭﻡ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻜﻤﻴﺔ .
أ ـ ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (v nﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ .
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﺠﺏ ﺘﺨﻔﻴﻀﻬﺎ ﻴﻭﻤﻴﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺒﻨﺯﻴﻥ
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل .v 0
ﺒﻌﺩ 10ﺃﻴﺎﻡ ؟
ب ـ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ v nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ، nﺜ ﻡ . u n 30ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻝﺒﻠﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺴﻨﺔ 1990ﻫﻭ 45,4ﻤﻠﻴﻭﻥ
36ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ـ : ﻨﺴﻤﺔ ؛ ﺍﻨﺘﻘل ﺇﻝﻰ 52,6ﻤﻠﻴﻭﻥ ﻨﺴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺴﻨﺔ 2002
3u ﻨﺴﻤﻲ v 0ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ 1990ﻭ v nﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺒﻌﺩ
u 0 = 1ﻭ . u n +1 = n + 2
4 nﺴﻨﺔ .ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻴﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ ﻜل ﺴﻨﺔ ﺒﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ
3
(1ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ Dﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = x + 2ﻭ ∆ ﺜﺎﺒﺕ . r
4 (1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ . r
ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = xﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ .
(2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺒﻠﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ 2020؟
46
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺽ ﺸﻬﺭﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ؟ ﻋﻴﻥ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻬﻤﺎ ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ αﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . A
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . (2أ ـ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ u 2 ، u 1ﻭ u 3ﺜﻡ ﻤﺜﹼل ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ
(3ﻜﻡ ﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺽ ﺸﻬﺭﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﺸﺭﺓ ؟ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل .
(4ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺍﻗﺘﺭﻀﻪ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﺨﻼل ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭ ب ـ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﻥ u 4ﻭ . u 5
ﺴﻨﻭﺍﺕ ؟ (3ﻨﻀﻊ . v n = u n − α
40ﺍﻝﺴﻌﺭ p 0ﻝﺒﻀﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ ﺒﻨﺴﺒﺔ 5%ﺴﻨﻭﻴﺎ .
أ ـ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ v 0ﺜ ﻡ v 1ﻭ . v 2
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ p1ﺴﻌﺭ ﺍﻝﺒﻀﺎﻋﺔ ﺨﻼل ﺴﻨﺔ ،ﻭ p 2ﺴﻌﺭﻫﺎ
ب ـ ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (v nﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ.
ﺨﻼل ﺴﻨﺘﻴﻥ ،ﻭ p nﺴﻌﺭﻫﺎ ﺨﻼل nﺴﻨﺔ ،ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . p 0
!ـ ـ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ v nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ، nﺜ ﻡ u nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
(2ﺨﻼل ﻜﻡ ﺴﻨﺔ ﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺴﻌﺭ ﺍﻝﺒﻀﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻀﻌﻑ ؟
41ﻓﻲ ﺴﻨﺔ 2000ﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻗﺭﻴﺔ 526ﻨﺴﻤﺔ ، 37ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ـ ، u n +1 = au n + b
ﻭﻷﺴﺒﺎﺏ ﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺒﺩﺃ ﻴﺘﻘﻠﺹ ﺒﻨﺴﺒﺔ 2%ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺴﻨﺔ . ﻤﻊ a ≠ 0ﻭ a ≠ 1ﻭﺍﻝﺤ ﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل . u 0
ﻨﻀﻊ u 1 ، u 0 = 526 :ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻝﺴﻨﺔ 2001ﻭ u n ﻨﺴﻤﻲ αﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺫﻴﻥ
ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺔ ﺒﻌﺩ nﺴﻨﺔ. ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ y = xﻭ . y = ax + b
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ u 1ﻭ . u 2 ﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ.
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﹼﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u 0 = αﻓﺈ
(2ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ u n +1ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ u nﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . ﻥ . u0 ≠ α
(2ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃ
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ u nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (v nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ـ v n = u n − αﻫﻲ
(3ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺴﻨﺔ 2009؟
ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ.
(4ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﻗل ﻤﻥ
(3ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ v nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﻭ ، v 0ﺜ ﻡ u nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﻭ . u 0
ﺍﻝﻨﺼﻑ ؟
(5ﺃﺤﺴﺏ u 311 ، u 310ﺃﻋﻁ ﺘﻔﺴﻴﺭﺍ ﻝﻠﻨﺘﻴﺠﺘﻴﻥ . *(ـ.06
ﺍﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺴﻨﺔ ﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ ؟ 51'. 38ر.
ﺘﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ. (u n )n∈ℕ (1ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u 0 = 1ﻭﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ
42ﻴﻘﺘﺭﺡ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﺭ ﻋﻘﺩﻴﻥ ﻝﻜﺭﺍﺀ ﻤﺴﻜﻥ ﻝﻤﺩﺓ 8 .2
ﺴﻨﻭﺍﺕ .ﻴﺩﻓﻊ ﻋﻤﺭ 5000 DAﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ u nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n ﺃ.
(1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻘﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل ،ﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺀ ﻴﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﻜل ﺴﻨﺔ ﺒﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﺏ .ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ . S n = u 0 + u 1 + ... + u n
. 150 DA (v n )n∈ℕ (2ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ v 5 = 32ﻭ . v 8 = 256
ﻨﻀﻊ u nﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺀ ﻝﻠﺴﻨﺔ . n ﻋﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻭﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل ، v 0ﺜﻡ ﺃ.
ﺃ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺜﻤﻥ . u 2 ﺍﻜﺘﺏ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ v nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
ﺏ( ﺃﻜﺘﺏ u nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . u 8 ﺏ .ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ . S 'n = v 0 + v 1 + ... + v n
ﺕ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺀ ﻝﺜﻤﺎﻨﻲ ﺴﻨﻭﺍﺕ. (3ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ (w n ) n∈ℕﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :ﻤﻥ
(2ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻘﺩ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺀ ﻴﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﻜل ﺴﻨﺔ ﺒﻨﺴﺒﺔ . 3% ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . w n = 2n + 2n + 1 : n
ﻨﻀﻊ v nﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺀ ﻝﻠﺴﻨﺔ . n ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ، nﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ . T n = w 0 + w 1 + ... + w n
ﺃ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺜﻤﻥ . v 2 39ﺘﻌﺎﻗﺩ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﻤﻊ ﺒﻨﻙ ﻝﻘﺭﺽ ﻤﺒﺎﻝﻎ ﻤﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻝﻤﺩﺓ 10
ﺏ( ﺃﻜﺘﺏ v nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ .v 8 ﺴﻨﻭﺍﺕ ،ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻴﻘﺭﺽ 9000 DAﺸﻬﺭﻴﺎ ﺜﻡ
ﺕ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺀ ﻝﺜﻤﺎﻨﻲ ﺴﻨﻭﺍﺕ . ﻴﺯﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺴﻨﺔ ﺒﻨﺴﺒﺔ . 3%ﻨﺴﻤﻲ u nﺍﻝﻤﺒﻠﻎ
(3ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻘﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻤﺭ . ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻘﺭﻀﻪ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﺸﻬﺭﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ . n
47
ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺩﺩ
45ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ) (u nﻭ ) (v nﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕـ : ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺭﺍﺡ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ . 43
1
= u n +1 = u n − 2 ، u 0ﻭ .v n = u n + 4
1 (1ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻫﻲ
2 2
ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ .
ﻤﻴﺯ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﻤل ﺍﻝﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻝﺠﻤل ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻁﺌﺔ .
1 أ ـ u 0 = −1ﻭ . u n +1 = u n + 0,1
. (u n ) (1ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ
2 2
n
ب ـ .u n =
(u n ) (2ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . −2 3
1
(v n ) (3ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ
1
. = .u n ـ ـ
2 n +1
(v n ) (4ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . 4 u
د ـ u 0 = 4ﻭ . u n +1 = n
(v n ) (5ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ . 2
(2ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻫﻲ
ﺃﺫﻜﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺇﻥ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ 46
ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ
ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺌﺔ .
2n − 3 أ ـ u n = −3n + 1؛
. ) (u nﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ
n +1 ب ـ u 0 = 4ﻭ . u n +1 = −3u n
(u n ) (1ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ . 1
u n = n +؛ ـ ـ
(2ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ . 2
(3ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ . −1 د ـ u 0 = 1ﻭ . u n +1 = u n + 1
(4ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . 2 ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﻗﺘﺭﺍﺡ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻴﻨﻪ. 44
1
1
(5ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ . = un (u n ) (1ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ
n
un
أ ـ ) (u nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ؛
47ﻤﺎ ﻗﻭﻝﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ؟
(1ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻭﻗﺕ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ . ب ـ ) (u nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ؛
(2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﻓﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ، ـ ـ ) (u nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ؛
ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﺴﺎﻝﺒﺎ ﻓﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ . د ـ ) (u nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ .
(3ﻜل ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ . (2ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ـ u 0 = 14 :ﻭﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ
) (u n (4ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ u n = u 0q ، nﺇﺫﻥ
n
ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ u n +1 = 4 u n + 3 ، nﻭ v n = u n + 1
ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ . ) (v nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ. أـ
(5ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ) (u nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ ﺤﺩﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ
) (u nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ. بـ
ﻭﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ qﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ،ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ
) (v nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . 4 ـ ـ
u
ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﻴﻥ mﻭ . m = q m − n ، n
un ) (u nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . 4 دـ
48
ﺍﻝﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻬﺩﻓﺔ
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ.
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻁ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ.
ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻜﻤﺔ
ﻋﺭﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺠﻌﻔﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺼﻭﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﻴﺘﻪ ﺒﻨﺸﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ،ﻭﺭﻋﺎﻴﺘﻪ ﻝﻠﻌﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻠﻤﻴﻥ ﻭﻏﻴﺭﻫﻡ ،ﻭﻗﻴﺎﻤﻪ ﺒﺈﻨﺸﺎﺀ
"ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﻜﻤﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﻗﺼﺭ ﺍﻝﺨﻼﻓﺔ ﺒﺒﻐﺩﺍﺩ ،ﻭﺇﺸﺭﺍﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺒﻨﻔﺴﻪ ،ﻝﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﺍ ﻝﻠﺘﺭﺠﻤﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺭﺒﻴﺔ .ﻭﻗﺩ ﺃﺭﺴل ﺃﺒﻭ
ﺠﻌﻔﺭ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺇﻤﺒﺭﺍﻁﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻭﻡ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺒﻌﺽ ﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻨﺎﻥ ﻓﺒﻌﺙ ﺇﻝﻴﻪ ﺒﻜﺘﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻁﺏ ﻭﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻝﻔﻠﻙ،
ﻓﻘﺎﻡ ﻨﻔﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺠﻤﻴﻥ ﺒﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺭﺒﻴﺔ.
ﻭﻓﻲ ﻋﻬﺩ ﻫﺎﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺸﻴﺩ ﺠﺎﺌﺘﻪ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺘﺏ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻫﺭﻗﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻗﻠﻴﻡ ﺒﻴﺯﻨﻁﺔ ،ﻭﻗﺩ ﺃﻭﻜل ﺇﻝﻰ ﻴﻭﺤﻨﺎ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺎﺴﻭﻴﻪ
ﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺘﺭﺠﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﺘﺏ ،ﻓﻠﻡ ﺘﻌﺩ ﺘﻘﺘﺼﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺤﻔﻅ ﺍﻝﻜﺘﺏ ﺒل ﻭﻀﻡ ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺠﺎﻨﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺠﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺴﺨﻴﻥ ﻭﺍﻝﺨﺎﺯﻨﻴﻥ
ﺍﻝﺫﻴﻥ ﻴﺘﻭﻝﻭﻥ ﺘﺨﺯﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺘﺏ ،ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺠﻠﺩﻴﻥ ﻭﻏﻴﺭﻫﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ.
وﻗﺩ ﺒﻠﻎ ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﺫﺭﻭﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻬﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺄﻤﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺃﻭﻻﻩ ﻋﻨﺎﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺌﻘﺔ ،ﻭﻭﻫﺒﻪ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺎﻝﻪ ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻪ ،ﻭﻜﺎﻥ
ﻴﺸﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﻜﻤﺔ ،ﻭﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻤﻜﻨﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﻐﺎﺕ .ﻭﻗﺩ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺄﻤﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻗﺒﺭﺹ ﺨﺯﺍﻨﺔ ﻜﺘﺏ
ﺍﻝﺭﻭﻡ.
ﻭﺒﺫﻝﻙ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﺨﺯﺍﻨﺔ ﻜﺘﺏ ،ﻭﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺘﺭﺠﻤﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻝﺘﺄﻝﻴﻑ ﻭ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻝﻸﺒﺤﺎﺙ ﻭﺭﺼﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﺠﻭﻡ ،ﻭﻤﻥ ﺃﻫﻡ ﻤﺎ ﻤﻴﺯ
ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺘﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﺩﻴﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻔﺕ ﻝﻠﺨﻠﻔﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻨﺴﺨﺕ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺎ
ﺠﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻤﺠﻤﻌﺎ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺎ ﻭﻅل ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺍﺠﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻝﻤﻐﻭل ﺒﻐﺩﺍﺩ ﺴﻨﺔ )656ﻫـ = 1258ﻡ(ﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻡ ﺘﺩﻤﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﻅﻡ
ﻤﺤﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺍﻝﻭﻗﺕ.
iﻫﺎﺭﻭﻥ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺒﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺱ ﻭ ﻴﻠﻘﺏ ﺒﻬﺎﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺸﻴﺩ
)ﺤﻭﺍﻝﻲ 763ﻡ 24 -ﻤﺎﺭﺱ 809ﻡ( ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺴﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻤﺱ ،ﻭﻫﻭ ﺃﺸﻬﺭ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺴﻴﻴﻥ .ﺤﻜﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ 786ﻭ 809ﻡ.
iﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻝﻤﺄﻤﻭﻥ ﺒﻥ ﻫﺎﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺸﻴﺩ .ﻭﻝﺩ ﻋﺎﻡ 170ﻫـ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻬﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﺴﺘﺨﻠﻑ ﺃﺒﻭﻩ
ﻭﺘﻭﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ 218ﻫـ.
ﻓﺘﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺨﻼﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻬﺠﺭﻱ .218- 198 :ﻓﺘﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺨﻼﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻴﻼﺩﻱ.833- 813 :
49
ا
ط اول
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ −3; 2ﺒﹻ f ( x ) = x + x − 2
2
4
3
2
1
0
-4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3
-1
-2
-3
50
ا
ط ا
(C fﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ. ) ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ∆ ( ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ.0
6
)∆( 5
4
3
2
1
0
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3
-1
-2
)( 2
)( 3 )(1
-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4
51
↵ ﺘﺫﻜﻴﺭ ﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ
.1ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ a x + b
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ b ، a :ﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ . a ≠ 0
b
x ∞− − ∞+
a
ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ a x + b ﻋﻜﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ a 0 ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ a
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻴﺅﻭل ﺤل ﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ( a x + b ≥ 0 ) a x + b ≤ 0ﺇﻝﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ . a x + b
.2ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ a x 2 + b x + c
b ، aﻭ cﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ . a ≠ 0
ﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ a x 2 + b x + cﻨﻤﻴﺯ ﺜﻼﺙ ﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻴﺯ ∆ ﺤﻴﺙ . ∆ = b − 4ac
2
52
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ xﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ) f ( xﻭ ) g ( xﺤﻴﺙ:
g ( x ) = −3x + 2 ، f ( x ) = 2x + 4
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ( a ≠ 0 ) a x + bﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺒﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ax + b = 0ﺜﻡ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ . a
ﺤل:
2x + 4 = 0 .1ﻴﻌﻨﻲ 2x = −4ﺃﻱ 2x + 4 . x = −2ﻫﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل a x + bﻤﻊ a = 2ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ : a > 0
x ∞−
−2 ∞+
ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ 2 x + 4 - 0 +
2
−3x + 2 = 0 .2ﻴﻌﻨﻲ −3x = −2ﺃﻱ = −3x + 2 . xﻫﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل a x + bﻤﻊ a = −3ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ : a < 0
3
2
x ∞− ∞+
3
ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ −3x + 2 + 0 -
53
↵ ﺘﺫﻜﻴﺭ ﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ
.1ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﻤﺄﻝﻭﻓﺔ
b ، aﻭ kﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ f .ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻭ f ′ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ.
) f (x k a x +b x2 n ∈ℕ) x nﻭ ( n ≥ 2 1
x
1
) f ′(x 0 a 2x nx n −1 − 2
x
ﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ℝ ℝ ℝ ℝ [ ]−∞ ; 0ﻭ [∞ ]0; +
ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ:
ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . x ֏ 2 x ֏ 2x − 3 ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ •
ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . x ֏ 3x 2 ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ x 3 •
.3ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل Iﻤﻥ ℝﻭ ) (C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ. ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ:
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺒﻠﺕ fﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ aﻤﻥ Iﻓﺈﻥ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) (C fﻴﻘﺒل ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) ) A ( a ; f ( a
ﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻬﻪ ) f ′ ( aﻭ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ:
) y = f ′ ( a )( x − a ) + f ( a
54
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
). f ( x ) = 2x 3 − x 2 + 5x + 3 ( 3 . f (x ) = x 2
) − 4x + 5 ( 2 ). f ( x ) = −3x + 1 (1
ﺤل:
.1ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ . f ′ ( x ) = −3 ، ℝ
.2ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ . f ′ ( x ) = 2x − 4 ، ℝ
.3ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ . f ′ ( x ) = 6x 2 − 2x + 5 ، ℝ
2x + 3
= ) . f (x ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :2ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ ]−1; +ﺒﹻ
x +1
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
.2ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﹻ ) ∆ ( ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . 0
ﺤل:
.1ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ ]−1; +ﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ [∞ ، ]−1; +
)2 ( x + 1) − 1( 2x + 3 2x + 2 − 2x − 3 −1
= ) . f ′(x = =
)( x + 1 )( x + 1 )( x + 1
2 2 2
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :3ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ −3; 2ﺒﹻ . f ( x ) = x 2 + x
.1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
.2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﹻ ) ∆ ( ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . −2ﻤﺜل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ
ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) ∆ ( .
ﺤل:
.1ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ −3; 2ﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ ]. f ′ ( x ) = 2x + 1 ، [ −3; 2
1
x = −ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ) f ′ ( xﻫﻲ ﻜﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ: 2x + 1 = 0ﻴﻌﻨﻲ 2x = −1ﺃﻱ
2
1
x −3 − 2
2
ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ) f ′ ( x - 0 +
1
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ) f ′ ( xﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ −3; − 2
1
ﻭ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . − ; 2
2
.2ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ∆ ( ﻫﻲy = f ′ ( −2 )( x + 2 ) + f ( −2 ) :
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ f ( −2 ) = 2ﻭ . f ′ ( −2 ) = −3ﻨﺠﺩ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻭﻴﺽ. y = −3x + 4 :
55
ﻤﻥ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]: [ −2; 2
−4
.1ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
56
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ −3;1ﺒﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) (C fﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ.
.1ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺠﺩﺍﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
57
ﻤﻭﻀﻭﻉ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
y
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O ; i, j
5 3
) (Cﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل − 2 ; 2
.1ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
5 3
1 .2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x ) = 0ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل − 2 ; 2
58
ﻤﻭﻀﻭﻉ ﻤﻊ ﺇﺭﺸﺎﺩﺍﺕ
ﺇﺭﺸﺎﺩﺍﺕ
.2ﺃ -ﻁﺒﻕ ﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺩﻭﺍل ﺃﻭ ﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺕ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) f ( xﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل.1
ﺏ -ﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ) f '( xﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺜﻼﺜﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ.
ﺏ -ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x ) = 0ﻫﻲ ﻓﻭﺍﺼل ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل.
.6ﺃ -ﻻﺤﻅ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = 2
59
ﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻜل ﻤﻥ fﻭ g ر
h ، g ، f 6ﻭ kﺩﻭﺍل ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ −2; 2ﺒـ: 1ـ *آ" ('ل ا
&د$ت و ا
"#ا! ت
1ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ xﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ) f ( x
، g ( x) = 2 + 2 x ، f ( x) = 1 − x
ﻭ ) g ( xﺤﻴﺙ:
1 3
k ( x) = − x ، h( x ) = x +
2 2 g ( x ) = −3 x + 5 ، f ( x ) = 3x − 5
ﻭ ) (C3 ) ، (C2 ) ، (C1ﻭ ) (C4ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼﺕ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ xﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ) f ( x 2
y ﻭ ) g ( xﺤﻴﺙ:
6
2 1
g ( x ) = − x −1 ، f ( x) = x +1
) (C 2 3 2
5
3اﺩﺭﺱ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ xﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ) f ( x
4 ﻭ ) g ( xﺤﻴﺙ:
) (C 4
3 g ( x ) = −0, 01x − 0,5 ، f ( x) = 8 − 2x
) (C1
4ﺇﻝﻴﻙ ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼﺕ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ) (Ch ) ، (C g ) ، (C fﻭ ) (Ck
2
ﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺩﻭﺍل ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻴﺔ h ، g ، fﻭ kﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
1 ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل
y
-2 -1 0 1 2 x ) (C f 3 ) (C h
-1
) (C 3 2
) (Ck
1
-2
) k ( x ) ، h ( x ) ، g ( xﻭ ) m ( xﺤﻴﺙ:
ﺇﻝﻴﻙ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ g 5
، g ( x ) = − x 2 + 7 x − 12 ، f ( x ) = 2x2 + x − 3
x -1 3 5
1
k ( x ) = − x 2 + 5 x − 20 ، h ( x ) = 2 x 2 − x + 5
2
)f ( x 0
)m ( x ) = (2 x − 10)(5 − 7 x
60
y
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ 10 ) (C h ) (C k
4
ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ: ) (C g
3
y
2 2
1 1
2
1
)f ( x 3
−
2 )(1
-2 -1 0 1 x
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ: -1
f ( x) = −2 x 2 + 3 x − 10 (2
1 3 y
f ( x ) = x 3 + x 2 − x + 1 (3 -2 -1 0 1 x
3 2
-1
12ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ: -2 )(3
2x
= )f ( x (1 -3
x +1
-4
61
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ، ℝﻭ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ −x +1
17 = )f ( x (2
ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ) . (C x
4x + 5
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ = )f ( x (3
4x − 5
ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻬﻪ ﻫﻭ a 13ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ
A(−1 ; 3) (2ﻭ a = −2 A(2 ; 0) (1ﻭ a = 1 ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ) f ' ( aﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ
3 ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
A( −2 ; 3) (3ﻭ = A(2 ; 2) (4 aﻭ a = 2
2
ﻭ a = 3؛ ﺜﻡ a = −2 f ( x ) = 2 x − 7 (1
18ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ،ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ
ﻭ a = 1؛ ﺜﻡ a = − 2 f ( x) = −3 x − 1 (2
ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ ، x0ﺜﻡ ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
ﻭ . a = −1 f ( x) = x 2 − 3 (3
ﻝﻪ ،ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
2 ﻭ . a = 0 f ( x) = x 3 + 1 (4
2x
= ، yﻭ x0 = 3 (1ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Cﻫﻲ : 1
5 f ( x) = x 2 + x (5ﻭ . a = 2
2
(2ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Cﻫﻲ ، y = − x 2 + 4 :ﻭ x0 = 2
14ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ
(3ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Cﻫﻲ ، y = x 2 − 3 x + 2 :ﻭ x0 = 1
) f ' (aﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ
x −1
= ، yﻭ x0 = −2 (4ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Cﻫﻲ : ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
3x
y = x 2 − 2 x 19ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (Cﺃﻜﺘﺏ 2
ﻭ . a = −2 f ( x ) = (1
x
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . −1 1 −1
−4 20 ﻭ = . a = )f ( x (2
= yﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (Cﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ 2 2x
x 3
ﻭ . a = −3 = )f ( x (3
ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . 2 x +1
1 x+2
y = 2 − x 2 21ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C ﻭ a = −2؛ ﺜﻡ a = 3 = )f ( x (4
2 x
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ،1 x+2
ﻭ a = 2؛ ﺜﻡ a = −3 = )f ( x (5
x−3
ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . B ; 0
5
2 f 15ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ f ( x ) = x 2 :
(C ) 22ﻭ ) ( Dﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ : (1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ 3
y = x 2ﻭ . y = −4 x − 4 (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ∆ ﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ
(1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ) (Cﻭ ) . ( D ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ.0
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ) ( Dﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﹻ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ f 16ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ f ( x ) = 3 x3 :
ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ . (2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ 3
(C ) 23ﻤﻨﺤﻥ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A(2 ; 4ﻭ ) ∆ ( ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ∆ ﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = 3 x + 5 ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ.0
ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ، Aﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ • ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 17ﺇﻝﻰ 24ﻴﻨﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ
ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( . ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O ; i ; j
(C ) 24ﻤﻨﺤﻥ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ). A( −1 ; − 3
62
2 ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ، Aﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ
= yﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ) (C1 y = − x 2 + 3 29ﻭ
x ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻬﻪ . i
ﻭ ) (C2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜﻠﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ.
25ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺒﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆ ( ﻴﻤﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ A
ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ωﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . x 0
ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺘﻴﻴﻬﺎ.
. x0 = 0 ﻭ f : x ֏ x 2 + 3 x + 4 (1
(2ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆ ( .
. x0 = −1 ﻭ f : x ֏ 2 x 3 − x 2 + 3x (2
(3ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ) (C1ﻭ ) (C2ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ
x+3
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( . x0 = 1 ﻭ ֏f :x (3
1 − 2x
30ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ f 26ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ: f ( x) = x 2 − 5 x + 4
f ( x ) = 1 − x 2 (2 f ( x ) = x 2 − x − 6 (1 ﻭ ) (Pﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . (O ; i ; j
f ( x) = x 2 + 3 x (4 f ( x ) = ( x − 2)( x − 4) (3
(1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ
31ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ
ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ
ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
(2ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Pﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻪ
f ( x ) = 1 − x 3 (2 f ( x ) = x 3 + 1 (1
). E (0 ; 4
1 1
f ( x ) = x 3 − x 2 − 2 x (4 f ( x ) = x 3 + 3 x (3 (3ﻫل ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ) (Pﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻤﺎﺴﻪ ﻋﻨﺩﻫﺎ
3 2
1
32ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . y = x
2
ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Dﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ: ﻋﻠﻰ
a (4ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Pﻋﻨﺩ
−3
؛ [∞ D = ]0; + = )f ( x (1 ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . a
x
x (5ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Pﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻴﺸﻤل
= ) f ( x؛ [∞ D = ]1; + (2
1− x ﻤﺒﺩﺃ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O
2x +1
= ) f ( x؛ [D = ]−∞ ; − 1 (3 27ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
x +1
−2 x + 3 ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
= ) f ( x؛ [D = ]−∞ ; − 4 (4
x+4 . f : x ֏ 3 x 2 − 4 x + 1 (1
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ 33 x2 1
֏. f :x − x + 5 (2
ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭ ﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ ﺒﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ.ﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ 2 2
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f 3 x 2 + 12 x + 1
y ֏. f :x (3
4 6
3
28ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
2
1 ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ)(1
−x + 1 −2
-4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 x ֏. f :x (2 ֏ f :x؛ (1
-1 x+2 x
-2 2x + 6 x +1
֏f :x ֏ f : x؛ (4 (3
-3
1− x x −3
63
x ∞− -2 0 ∞+ y
6
5
5
)f1 ( x
4
1 3
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ)(2
2
x ∞− -1 1 ∞+ 1
2
-4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 x
-1
)f 2 ( x
-2
y
x ∞− 0 2 ∞+
1
2
)f3 ( x ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ)(3
0 1 2 3 x
0
-1
35ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻭ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ
-2
ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ f ( x) = x3 :
x ∞− 0 ∞+
y
3
2
)f ( x 0
1
64
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻭﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل: 36ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) (Cﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ). f (0 ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ −0, 5; 4,5ﺒـ:
(2ﻫل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ) A(0; − 1ﻭ ) B (2; − 3ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ f ( x ) = x3 − 6 x 2 + 9 x + 1
ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f؟ y
10
(3ﺍﺫﻜﺭ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
(4ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ) f (1,5ﻭ ) f (1,8ﺜﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ )f (−0,5
8
ﻭ ). f (−0,8
6
4
(5ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻤﻤﻜﻨﺎ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
2
38ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) (Cﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] ، [ −1;3ﻭﻤﺜﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎﺕ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ 0 1 2 3 4 x
-2
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﻭﺍﺼﻠﻬﺎ 1 ، 0ﻭ .2
-4
y
2
-6
( )
ﻨﻘﺒل ﺃﻥ . f 1 − 2 = 0ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻭﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل 37ﻴﻌﻁﻰ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) ، (Cﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ fﻋﻠﻰ ]. [ −1;3 x -1 0 2 4
-2
.5ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ Fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ −1;3
2
)f ( x
0 -3
ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ Fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][ −1;3
65
ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺩﺩ
40ﺇﻝﻴﻙ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل 39ﻜل ﺴﺅﺍل ﻴﺘﻀﻤﻥ ﺇﺠﺎﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﺼﺤﻴﺔ ،ﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ:
]. [ −2;1 .1ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ :
1 f ( x) = −0,1x + 0, 6
x -2 -1 − 0 1
3
0 4 ﺃ f -ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
ﺏ f -ﺴﺎﻝﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
)f ( x 0
2 −
4 ﺠـ f -ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ] ]−∞ ; 6ﻭ ﺴﺎﻝﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ [∞ . [ 6; +
27
ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺭﻴﺭ ﺩ f -ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ [∞ [ 6; +ﻭ ﺴﺎﻝﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ]. ]−∞ ; 6
][ 0;1 f (1ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ −2;0ﻭ ﺴﺎﻝﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ .2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ :
1 f ( x) = x 2 − 25 x + 156
(2ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ −2; − 3
ﺃ -ﻤﻤﻴﺯ ) f ( xﺴﺎﻝﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ.
4
− (3ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﺼﻐﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][ −1;1 ﺏ f '( x) -ﺘﻨﻌﺩﻡ ﻤﻐﻴﺭﺓ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
27
(4ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ. ﺠـ -ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]]−∞ ;12,5
ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ﻴﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ][ −2;1 (5ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x) = 1 ﻭ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ . [12,5; +
41ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺩ -ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x ) = 0ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ.
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
.3ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ :
y
2 )f ( x) = (1 − x)( x 2 − 6 x + 8
66
ﺍﻝﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻬﺩﻓﺔ
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻝﺤل ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ.
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻝﺤل ﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ.
ﻤﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ.
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﻨﻌﻁﺎﻑ.
ﻭﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻐﺭﺒﻲ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺸﺎﻫﻴﺭ ﺃﻁﺒﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺴﻼﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻥ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻴﻼﺩﻱ ،ﻭﻗﺩ ﻤﺎﺭﺱ
ﺍﻝﻁﺏ ﻭﺍﻝﺼﻴﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺎ.
ﻭﻤﻥ ﺃﺸﻬﺭ ﻜﺘﺒﻪ :ﻜﺘﺎﺏ " ﺇﻋﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﻨﺩﺴﻴﻥ " ﻭﻜﺘﺎﺏ " ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ " ﻭﻜﺘﺎﺏ " ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻴﺎﻩ " ﻭﻜﺘﺎﺏ " ﺍﻝﻤﻔﻴﺩ
ﺍﻷﻭﺴﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻁﺏ " ﻭﻗﺩ ﻗﺩﻡ ﺍﻝﻜﺴﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﻪ " ﺍﻝﻘﻭﺍﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﻱ " .
67
ا
ط اول
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x ) = 3x − 2ﻭ g ( x ) = 3x
( )
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ∆ ( ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i ; j
.1ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ∆ ( .
.2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺠﺩﻭل ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﻭﺭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒﻠﺔ.
∗ ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ) f ( xﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺒﺸﺭﻁ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺄﺨﺫ xﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ
ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﻓﻲ .ﻨﻘﻭل ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ∞ +ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞+
∞lim f ( x ) = + ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ:
∞x →+
ﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺒﺸﺭﻁ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺄﺨﺫ ) ( −x ∗ ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ −f ( x )
ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﻓﻲ .ﻨﻘﻭل ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ∞ −ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞−
∞lim f ( x ) = − ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ:
∞x →−
.3ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ ) f ( xﻭ ﻗﻴﻡ ) g ( xﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺄﺨﺫ ) xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ( −xﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﻓﻲ.
.4ﺨﻤﻥ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ) lim f ( xﻭ ) lim g ( xﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ﻭ ) lim f ( xﻭ ) lim g ( xﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ.
∞x →− ∞x →− ∞x →+ ∞x →+
ا
ط ا
g ( x ) = 2x 2
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x ) = 2x − 4x − 6ﻭ
2
( )
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i ; j
.1ﻤﺜل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C f
(C fﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل. ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻭﺍﺼل ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) .2
.3ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺠﺩﻭل ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﻭﺭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﺔ:
68
ا
ط ا
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x ) = x 3 + x − 2ﻭ g ( x ) = x 3
( )
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i ; j
.1ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺠﺩﻭل ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﻭﺭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﺔ:
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻴﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ f ′′ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f ′′ = ( f ′ )′ f ′
• ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ . f ′′ ( x ) ، ℝ
ﺤﺩﺩ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ، xﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ) . f ′′ ( xﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟ •
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻨﻌﺩﻤﺕ ) f ′′ ( xﻤﻐﻴﺭﺓ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x 0ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﻘﺒل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻨﻌﻁﺎﻑ ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ:
ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . x 0
69
↵ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ
.1ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻf ( x ) = 3x − 2 :
( )
ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i ; j
ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ :ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻭل lim f ( x ) = −∞ :ﻭ ∞. lim f ( x ) = + •
∞x →+ ∞x →−
ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ :ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ . f ′ ( x ) = 3 ، ℝ •
ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ f ′ ( x ) > 0 ، ℝﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ •
ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ: •
∞+
) f (x
∞−
ﺍﻝﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭﻴﻥ:
10
2
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) (C f = x ∗ f ( x ) = 0ﻴﻌﻨﻲ 3x − 2 = 0ﺃﻱ
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
3
2
-10 .ﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ) ( x ′xﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ
3
-20 ∗ f ( 0 ) = −2ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) (C fﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ) ( y ′y
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﻬﺎ . −2
.2ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ
ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ f : x ֏ ax + bﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = ax + bﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻪ ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺭﺴﻡ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻨﻪ. •
ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻭل ﺃﻥ lim f ( x ) = lim ( 3x ) :ﻭ ) . lim f ( x ) = lim ( 3x •
∞x →+ ∞x →+ ∞x →− ∞x →−
ﻭ ∞. lim ( ax + b ) = − ﻓﺈﻥ ∞lim ( ax + b ) = + ∗ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a < 0
∞x →+ ∞x →−
70
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :1ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻf ( x ) = 2x + 4 :
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻭ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞. +
.2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ.
.3ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
ﺤل:
lim f ( x ) = lim ( 2x ) = −∞ .1ﻭ ∞. lim f ( x ) = lim ( 2x ) = +
∞x →+ ∞x →+ ∞x →− ∞x →−
∞+
) f (x
1
0 1 x ∞−
.1ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = 2x + 4
ﻭﺘﻜﻔﻴﻨﺎ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﺭﺴﻤﻪ .ﻓﻤﺜﻼ f ( 0 ) = 4ﻭ . f ( −2 ) = 0
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :2ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻf ( x ) = − x + 2 :
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻭ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞. +
.2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ.
.3ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
ﺤل:
lim f ( x ) = lim ( −x ) = +∞ .2ﻭ ∞. lim f ( x ) = lim ( − x ) = −
∞x →+ ∞x →+ ∞x →− ∞x →−
∞+
) f (x
1
0 1 x ∞−
.3ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = − x + 2
ﻭﺘﻜﻔﻴﻨﺎ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﺭﺴﻤﻪ .ﻓﻤﺜﻼ f ( 0 ) = 2ﻭ . f (1) = 1
71
↵ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ
.1ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل
( )
ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i ; j ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻf ( x ) = 2x 2 − 4x − 6 :
ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ :ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ lim f ( x ) = +∞ :ﻭ ∞. lim f ( x ) = + •
∞x →+ ∞x →−
ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ :ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ . f ′ ( x ) = 4x − 4 = 4 ( x − 1) ، ℝ •
ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ ، ℝﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ) f ′ ( xﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ). ( x − 1 •
x − 1 ≤ 0ﻴﻌﻨﻲ x ≤ 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. ]−∞ ;1
x − 1 ≥ 0ﻴﻌﻨﻲ x ≥ 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ . [1; +
ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ :ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ f (1) = −8 •
∞+ ∞+
) f (x
−8
5
4
3 ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ :ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻌﺎﻨﺔ ﺒﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﺴﺎﻋﺩﺓ. •
2
1
0 ∗ 2x − 4x − 6 = 0ﻴﻌﻨﻲ x = −1ﺃﻭ x = 3ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) (C f 2
.2ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ
-7
-8
-9
∞ lim ( −2x + x − 2 ) = lim ( −2x ) = −ﻭ ∞. lim ( −2x + x − 2 ) = lim ( −2x ) = −
2 2 2 2
∞x →+ ∞x →+ ∞x →− ∞x →−
72
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻf ( x ) = − x 2 − x + 2 :
( )
ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ . O ; i ; j
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻭ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞. +
.2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ.
.3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ.
.4ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . 1
.5ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) ∆ ( .
ﺤل:
lim f ( x ) = lim ( −x 2 ) = −∞ .1ﻭ ∞. lim f ( x ) = lim ( −x 2 ) = −
∞x →+ ∞x →+ ∞x →− ∞x →−
∞− ∞−
1
0
.5ﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻋﺩﺓ
-4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3
-5
73
↵ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ
.1ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻf ( x ) = x 3 + x − 2 :
( )
ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ . O ; i ; j
ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ :ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ lim f ( x ) = −∞ :ﻭ ∞. lim f ( x ) = + •
∞x →+ ∞x →−
ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ :ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ . f ′ ( x ) = 3x 2 + 1 ، ℝ •
ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ f ′ ( x ) > 0 ، ℝﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ •
2
ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ: •
1
.2ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ
ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ ( a ≠ 0 ) f : x ֏ ax 3 + bx 2 + cx + dﻴﻘﺒل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻨﻌﻁﺎﻑ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ x 0ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ x 0 •
ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻨﻌﺩﻡ ﻋﻨﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ f ′′ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻐﻴﺭﺓ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ.
ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﺃﻥ lim f ( x ) = lim ( x 3 ) :ﻭ ) . lim f ( x ) = lim ( x 3 •
∞x →+ ∞x →+ ∞x →− ∞x →−
ﻭ ∞. lim ( ax 3 + bx 2 + cx + d ) = − ﻓﺈﻥ ∞lim ( ax 3 + bx 2 + cx + d ) = + ∗ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a < 0
∞x →+ ∞x →−
ﻤﺜﺎل:
∞ lim ( 2x 3 − x 2 − 3x + 1) = lim ( 2x 3 ) = −ﻭ ∞. lim ( 2x 3 − x 2 − 3x + 1) = lim ( 2x 3 ) = +
∞x →+ ∞x →+ ∞x →− ∞x →−
∞lim ( −3x 3 + 3x − 4 ) = lim ( −3x 3 ) = − ﻭ ∞lim ( −3x 3 + 3x − 4 ) = lim ( −3x 3 ) = +
∞x →+ ∞x →+ ∞x →− ∞x →−
74
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻf ( x ) = −x 3 − x 2 + 5x + 2 :
( )
ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ . O ; i ; j
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻭ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞. +
.2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ.
.3ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ . f ( x ) = ( x − 2 ) ( − x 2 − 3x − 1) ، ℝﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) (C fﻤﻊ ) . ( x ′x
.4ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C f
ﺤل:
lim f ( x ) = lim ( −x 3 ) = +∞ .1ﻭ ∞. lim f ( x ) = lim ( −x 3 ) = −
∞x →+ ∞x →+ ∞x →− ∞x →−
5
x ∞− − 1 ∞+
3
) f ′(x - 0 + 0 -
∞+ 5
) f (x
121
− ∞−
27
.3ﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺸﺭ:
) ( x − 2 ) ( −x 2 − 3x − 1) − x 3 − 3x 2 − x + 2x 2 + 6x + 2 = −x 3 − x 2 + 5x + 2 = f ( x
f ( x ) = 0ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ( x − 2 ) ( −x 2 − 3x − 1) = 0
5
4
ﺃﻭ − x 2 − 3x − 1 = 0 ﺃﻱ x = 2
3
− x − 3x − 1 = 0ه ∆ = 5و
ان ه:
2
2
3+ 5 3− 5
= x ′′ = x′و
−2 −2
1
-2
-5
75
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﺍﺴﺘﻤﺜﺎل
1
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ:
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ −1;1ﺒﹻ:
Q P f (x ) = 1− x 2
( )
ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i , j
0
-1 N 0 M 1 ﻨﺭﺴﻡ ﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼ MNQPﻤﺤﻭﺭﻩ ) (Oyﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻘﻊ
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ Mﻭ Nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ) (Oxﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺘﻘﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ Pﻭ Qﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C f
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﹻ ) a ( xﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل . MNQP
.1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ . a ( x ) = −2x 3 + 2x
.2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ aﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ 0;1ﺜﻡ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ.
.3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻌﺩﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل MNQPﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻝﻪ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ.
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ:
ﺘﺭﻴﺩ ﺇﺤﺩﻯ ﺍﻝﻤﺅﺴﺴﺎﺕ ﺼﻨﻊ "ﺭﻤﺯ" ﻝﻬﺎ ﻝﻪ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻭ ﺍﻷﺒﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ .ﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍل ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺭ . cm
ﻭ ﻗﺼﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻘﻠﻴﺹ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺎﻝﻴﻑ ،ﻨﺒﺤﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ.
76
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻁ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ،ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻭ ﻤﻨﺤﻥ
ﺇﻝﻴﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻭ ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﺩﻭﺍل.
ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ 1ﻭ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ AB
ﻜل ﻤﻨﺤﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﻴﻤﺜل ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺠﺯﺀ ﻤﻅﻠل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﺯﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ xﺤﻴﺙ . x = AM
.1ﺃﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﺸﻜل ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻪ .ﻴﺘﻡ ﺘﺒﺭﻴﺭ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﺍﻻﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ.
3
؟ .2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﻠل ﻤﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﻝﹻ
4
• ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ:
77
ﻤﻭﻀﻭﻉ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
( )
Cﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i ; J
(1أ ـ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻭ ∞+
ب ـ ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐ ﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ.
(2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ x = 0ﻫﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻨﻌﻁﺎﻑ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ . C
(3ﺍﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ∆ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ Cﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . A
(4ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ dﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = 2ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ Cﻓﻲ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ .
(5ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) f ( 2ﻭ ) f ( −2ﺜﻡ ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ∆ ﻭ . C
ﺤل ﻤﺨﺘﺼﺭ
ﺘﻌﺎﻝﻴﻕ (1أ ـ ∞ lim f ( x ) = lim x 3 = −ﻭ ∞. lim f ( x ) = lim x 3 = +
∞x →+ ∞x →+ ∞x →− ∞x →−
ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻨﻌﺘﻤﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ب ـ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ )f ' ( x ) = 3x − 3 = 3 ( x − 1
2 2
2 A
Bﻭ C − 3;2 3;2
C B
78
ﻤﻭﻀﻭﻉ ﻤﻊ ﺇﺭﺸﺎﺩﺍﺕ
( )
Cﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i ; J
.4ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ Cﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ Tﻭ ' Tﻤﻴل ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ 9ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ .
.5ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎﺕ ∆ T ،ﻭ ' Tﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ Cﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ .
ﺇﺭﺸﺎﺩﺍﺕ
.1ﻝﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ∞ −ﻭ ∞ +ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺠﺔ .
.2ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐ ﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻭ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺜﻡ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ .
.4ﻝﻺﺠﺎﺒﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ،ﻨﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ' ( x ) = 9ﻭﺘﺠﺩ ﺤﻠﻴﻥ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻭﻫﻤﺎ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﺎ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺱ .
.5ﻻﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ∆ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﺤﺎﻤل ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ،ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ Tﻭ ' Tﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ﻭﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ Cﺍﺒﺤﺙ ﻋﻥ
ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻤﺜﻼ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻪ ﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل .
79
2ـ ا!وال آ'&ات ا!$ود " ا!ر ا'* . .ر .
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 6ﺇﻝﻰ 9ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻴﻨﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ
fﺜﻡ ﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ .
) ( O; I , J 1ـ ا!وال آ'&ات ا!$ود " ا!ر او .
f ( x) = 3 x 2 − 6 x + 3 6 1ﺃﺭﻓﻕ ﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺒﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ :
f ( x) = x2 − 5 x + 6 7 f : x ֏ 3x − 2؛ g : x ֏ −3x − 2؛
f ( x) = − x 2 + 2 x + 3 8 g : x ֏ −3
y 1
y y
f ( x ) = 2( x − 1)(3 − x) 9 2
2
-1 0 1 x
f 10ﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ: 1
-1
1
ﻭ . g ( x) = x 2 − 2 x + 5 f ( x) = 3 x 2 − 7 x − 20 -1 0 1 2x -2 -2 -1 0 1 x
80
.4ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ 3ـ ا!وال آ'&ات ا!$ود " ا!ر ا'' .
ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O ; i, j 12ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ Tﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ.0 ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ؛
.5ﺍﺭﺴﻡ Tﻭ ) (Cﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ −2; 2, 5 ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﻫﺎ ،ﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ .
17ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ : x ∞− -1 2 ∞+
g ( x) = x3 − 3x f ( x ) = x 2 − 3 xﻭ )f '( x + 0 - 0 +
.1ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ : f )f ( x 0 1
ﺃ -ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ' fﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f ∞− -3
ﺏ -ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ' fﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ . f 13ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
.2ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ : g ) ( O; I , J ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ
ﺃ -ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ' gﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ g f (x ) = 3x 3 − 6x + 3 (1
ﺏ -ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ' gﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ . g f ( x ) = x 3 − 5x + 6 (2
.3ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ : g f ( x ) = − x 3 + 2x 2 (3
ﺃ -ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ) (C fﻭ ) (C gﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ g f (x ) = ( x + 2 ) (x − 1)(3 − x ) (4
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O ; i, j 14ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻨﻘﻁﺔ
)ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]( [ −2; 2 ﺍﻨﻌﻁﺎﻑ ﻝـ ) (C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ) (C f
ﺒﻘﺭﺍﺀﺓ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺫﻜﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) (C fﻭ ) (C gﻭ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭ )I (0;1 f ( x) = x3 − x + 1 (1
ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ. x3
ﻭ )I (0; −1 = )f ( x − 4 x + 1 (2
3
ﺏ-ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) . f ( x) = g ( x
ﻭ )I (1;1 f ( x ) = x3 − 3 x 2 + 3 (3
ﺠـ-ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) (C fﻭ ) . (C g
15ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ :
.ر -ّ./ـّـ.+ . f ( x ) = x3 − 3 x 2 + 4 x − 5
1ـ ا!وال آ'&ات ا!$ود " ا!ر او . ( C fﺭﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 18ﺇﻝﻰ 21ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . ( O , I , J
fﺜﻡ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ .
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . 1
. f : x ֏ 4x − 3 18
.2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = x − 4
. f : x ֏ −3x + 4 19
1 ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ . f ( x ) − ( x − 4) = ( x − 1) 3
. f : x ֏ − x + 2 20
2 .3ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D
3 1
. f : x ֏ x + 21 16ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ :
2 2
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 22ﺇﻝﻰ 25ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ : . f ( x) = x 3 − 3x − 3
-ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ∞ −ﻭ ∞. + .1ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻭ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞. +
-ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻭﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ . .2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ' fﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
-ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻬﺎ . .3ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
81
.4ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩل ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ Tﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ . f : x ֏ 5x − 1 22
ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ . x0 = 2 . f : x ֏ −5x + 4 23
5
.5ﺤل ﺠﺒﺭﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ). f ( x ) = g ( x . f : x ֏ − x + 5 24
2
.6ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) (C fﻭ ). ( D 5 3
. f : x ֏ x + 25
.7ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ( D ) ، Tﻭ ) (C fﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ. 2 2
2ـ ا!وال آ'&ات ا!$ود " ا!ر ا'* .
30ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) (O ; i, jﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ Pﺍﻝﺫﻱ f 26ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ ( a ≠ 0) ، y = ax 2 + bx + c C f . f ( x ) = 3x 2 − 5x + 2ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ .
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ b ، aﻭ cﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ Pﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ .1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻭ ∞ +ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ) (Oxﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ 3ﻭ ﻴﻘﻁﻊ .2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ) (Oyﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﻬﺎ 2ﻭ ﻴﻘﺒل .3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻲ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ C fﻤﻊ ﺤﺎﻤل ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﺜﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ
ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﻫﺎﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ،ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ . C f
ﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = 2 x + 2
y .4ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ . C f
31ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ
D 27ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ
2 x2
) . ( O; I , J = y؛ y = −x + 4 : C2
2
: C1
5
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ y = x 2 − 3x + 2 : C 3
1
ﺒـ f ( x ) = ax 2 + bx + c f 28ﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ:
A 1
0 1 ﺤﻴﺙ b، aﻭ cﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔx ، ﻭ . g ( x) = − x 2 − 2 x + 3 f ( x) = x2 − 2 x − 3
2
ﻭ Γﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل
B ) (C fﻭ ) (C gﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل.
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O ; i, j
Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ، Γﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ Γﻋﻨﺩ Aﻴﺸﻤل
.1ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ . g
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ )D ( 0;3
.2ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ) (C fﻭ ) . (C g
.1ﺒﻘﺭﺍﺀﺓ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ) f ( 2 ) ، f (1ﻭ )f ' (1
.3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺠﺒﺭﻴﺎ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ) (C fﻭ ) ، (C g
.2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ b ، aﻭ . c
ﺜﻡ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ.
3ـ ا!وال آ'&ات ا!$ود " ا!ر ا'' .
.4ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺠﺒﺭﻴﺎ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ) ، f ( x) − g ( xﺃﻋﻁ ﺘﻔﺴﻴﺭﺍ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ
f 32ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺸﺎﺭﺓ.
. f ( x ) = x3 − 3 x 2 − 5 x + 4
) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . 29ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ :
(1ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f g ( x) = 3 − x f ( x ) = x 2 − x − 1ﻭ
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) S (1; −3ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻨﻌﻁﺎﻑ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C ) (C fﻭ ) ( Dﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ
(3ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ) . (C ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O ; i, j
f 33ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺤﻴﺙ : .1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻭ ∞. +
1 1 13
f ( x ) = x3 − x 2 − 2 x + .2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ' fﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ.
3 2 12
.1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ ∞ −ﻭﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ ∞. + .3ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
.2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ) f ' ( xﺜﻡ ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
82
−19 − 163 .3ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ 0ﻭ
18 1
.4ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ I ;0 ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻨﻌﻁﺎﻑ ﻝﻠﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ. 2
( )
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ O ; i ; j
.6ﺍﺭﺴﻡ T2 ، T1ﻭ ) (Cﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . (O ; i, j
.5ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x ) = 0 :
2".ـ1ـ.0 .6ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
345. 36ر.
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝـ : 34ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ :
. f ( x ) = −x 3 + 3x f ( x) = x 3 − 3 x − 1
Cﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ .1ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ) ℝﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ(.
( )
ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i ; J .2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ Tﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﺭﺩﻴﺔ . ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ. 0
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ Cﻤﻊ ﺤﺎﻤل ﻤﺤﻭﺭ .3ﺤﺩﺩ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ Tﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C
ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل . .4ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ Pﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = x 2 − 2 x + 1
(3ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f ﺃ -ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ :
(4ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ∆ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ
g ( x) = x 2 − 2 x + 1
ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . x 0 = 3
ﺏ -ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A(2;1ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ) (C
(5ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ∆ ﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ . C
345. 37ر. ﻭ. P
4 .5ﺃ -ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ :
fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝـ . f ( x ) = x 3 − x + 1 :
3 )x 3 − x 2 − x − 2 = ( x − 2)( x 2 + x + 1
ﻴﺭﻤﺯ Cﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ
ﺏ -ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ) (Cﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ .P
( )
ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i ; J
.6ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ) (Cﻭ Pﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ .
1 1
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ f (1) ، f − ، f ﻭ ). f ( −1 35ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ −2; 0,5ﺒـ :
2 2
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺤﺩﻱ ﻤﺠﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ . 19 11
f ( x ) = x3 + x 2 + x − 3
(2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ . 2 2
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ ) (Cﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ
(3ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ∆ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ
ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . x = 0 ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ.
(4ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ Cﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ .1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ' fﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ.
. y = 1ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ∆ ﺜﻡ . C .2ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ −2; 0,5
.1 38ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺒﺤﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ .3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ f (−2) = 0ﺜﻡ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ :
، fﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) (C fﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ 3
f ( x) = ( x + 2)(3x − 1) x +
ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O ; i, jﻴﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ: 2
(C f ) -ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﻭ ﻴﻘﺒل ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ .4ﺤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ −2; 0,5ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ، f ( x ) = 0ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻬﻪ .-2 ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻓﻲ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ.5.ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ T1ﻭ T2ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
83
= yﺜﻡ ﺤل
x 3
ﺏ( ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ + -ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ 1
2 2
x 3 ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = 3 x + 1
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ f ( x ) < +
2 2 -ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A( −1; 2ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) . (C f
.3ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ Fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]. [ 0; 4ﺃﻋﻁ ﻨﻀﻊ ، f ( x) = ax 3 + bx 2 + cx + dﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ .f
ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ Fﻤﺒﺭﺭﺍ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ. ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ﻨﻘﺒل ﺃﻥf ( x ) = x 3 + x 2 − 2 x :
40ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼ ﻤﺤﻴﻁﻪ Pﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 4cm .2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻤﻊ ﺤﺎﻤل
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺃﺒﻌﺎﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل )ﻁﻭﻝﻪ Lﻭ ﻋﺭﻀﻪ ( ℓﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل .
3
ﺃﻥ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻪ Sﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ . cm 2 .3ﺃﻋﻁ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ Tﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻋﻨﺩ ، Oﻋﻴﻥ
4
.2ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻌﻴﻥ ﺃﺒﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻪ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻪ ﻤﻊ ) . (C f
ﻋﻅﻤﻰ. .4ﺠﺩ ﻓﻭﺍﺼل ﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ
ﺃ -ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ Sﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . ℓ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل.
ﺏ -ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ : .5ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺒﺤﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ aﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻴﻜﻭﻥ
)f ( x ) = x(2 − x ﻋﻨﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . O
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ' fﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ .ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍ -ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ aﻫﻲ ﺤل ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) . f (a ) = a f '(a
ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . fﺍﺭﺴﻡ ) (C fﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ f ﺏ -ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺒﺔ.
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][ 0; 2 39ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
ﺠـ -ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺒﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺤﻴﻁﻪ Pﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ] [ 0; 4ﻭ Cﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ
( )
4cmﻭﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻪ Sﻋﻅﻤﻰ. y
4
O; i , j
ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ xﻭ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺎ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ ، aﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Nﻭ Qﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﺤﺎﻤل ﻤﺤﻭﺭ
ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل.ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ∆ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ Cﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
Sﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ .
5
A
. P 2; ﻭ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ). S ( 3;1
2
F E .1ﺃ( ﻋﻴﻥ ) f ' ( 2 ) ، f ' (1ﻭ )f ' ( 3
ﺏ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ∆ .
a
.2ﺃ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
4 16
.2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺃﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝـ xﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ Sﺼﻐﺭﻯ؟
A B x
.3ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ،ﺍﺤﺴﺏ .
a
43ﻋﻨﺩ ﺼﻨﻊ ﺨﻴﻤﺔ ،ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻗﺩﺭ ﻤﻤﻜﻥ
ﻨﻀﻊ AM = xﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﹻ ) A( xﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﻴﺯ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻬﻭﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺩﺨل ﺍﻝﺨﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻔﺘﻭﺤﺎ.
ﺍﻝﻤﻠﻭﻥ . ﻭﻀﻌﻨﺎ ﻤﻘﻁﻌﺎ ﻝﻤﺩﺨل ﺍﻝﺨﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ABC
π ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ . 2cm
= ). A( x
2
(−x 2
)
.1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ + 4 x
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل MNPQﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﺏ.
.2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ) A( x ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ BCﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ
ﻋﻅﻤﻰ. ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل MNPQﻋﻅﻤﻰ.
.3ﻫل ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﻝﻬﺫﺍ ،ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ
) A( xﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺼﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﺫﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) )، ( BCﺍﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل(.ﻨﻀﻊ BM = NC = x
ﻗﻁﺭﺍﻫﻤﺎ ] [ AMﻭ ] [ MB؟
.4ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ) A( xﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺼﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﺫﻴﻥ
ﻗﻁﺭﺍﻫﻤﺎ ] [ AMﻭ ] . [ MB
.1 45ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Vﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ : A
.2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ . AH = 3
.3ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻁﺎﻝﺱ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ MQ = 3 x
12 .4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ Sﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل MNPQﻫﻲ :
) . S ( x) = 2 3 ( x − x 2
.5ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ Sﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ 0;1
ﺃ -ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺒﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺄﺨﺫﻫﺎ xﻫﻲ .6ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﻌﺩﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل MNPQﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻪ
ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ 0; 6 ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ.
ﺏ -ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺤﺠﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻤﻌﻁﻰ ﺒـ ) . V ( x ﺤﻴﺙ M . AB = 4 ] [ AB 44ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ
ﺠـ -ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺠﻌل ﺍﻝﺤﺠﻡ Vﻴﺄﺨﺫ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ] . [ ABﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﻫﻤﺎ ] [ AM
ﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ،ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺤﺠﻡ.
ﻭ ] . [ MB
85
ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺩﺩ
(1 49ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻨﻌﻁﺎﻑ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻫﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻤل ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺭﺍﺤﺎﺕ .
ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ . 46ﻴﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
1y
(2ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺯﻭﺠﻴﺔ ﻴﻘﺒل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻨﻌﻁﺎﻑ .
-2 -1 0 1 2 x
-2
(4ﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﺔ.
-3
(4ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. ]−∞ ;1 ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ ﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ :
∞+ −1 ∞−
(5ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x ) = 0ﻻ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻓﻲ . ℝ
x
86
ﺍﻝﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻬﺩﻓﺔ
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻭ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞. +
ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻭ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞. +
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺘﻔﺴﻴﺭﻫﺎ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ.
ام )1131-1040م(
ﺤﻜﻴﻡ ﻭﻓﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﻋﺎﻝﻡ ﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺸﺎﻋﺭ ﻫﻭ ﻏﻴﺎﺙ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻥ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺍﻝﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﻤﺭ ﺒﻥ ﺇﺒﺭﺍﻫﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺨﻴﺎﻡ ﻭﻝﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻴﺴﺎﺒﻭﺭ ﻋﺎﺼﻤﺔ
ﺨﺭﺍﺴﺎﻥ ،ﺒﺩﺃ ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺤﺩﻯ ﻤﺩﺍﺭﺱ ﻨﻴﺴﺎﺒﻭﺭ ﻝﺘﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺍﺀﺓ ﻭﺍﻝﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ،ﻭﻝﻤﺎ ﻗﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﺸﺘﺩ ﺴﺎﻋﺩﻩ ﺭﺤل ﺇﻝﻰ ﺴﻤﺭﻗﻨﺩ
ﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ،ﻓﺄﻨﺠﺯ ﻨﻅﺎﻤﹰﺎ ﻝﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﺍﺘﺴﺎﻋ ﹰﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻏﺭﻴﻕ ،ﻓﺄﻝﻑ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﹰﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺭﺒﻴﺔ ) ﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒﻠﺔ( ﺘﺭﺠﻡ ﺇﻝﻰ
ﺍﻝﻔﺭﻨﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻡ ) .(1851ﻜﻤﺎ ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻻﺴﺘﺨﺭﺍﺝ ﺠﺫﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﺎﻝﺞ ﻷﻭل ﻤﺭﺓ ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﺍﻝﺘﻜﻌﻴﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭ ﻭﻝﻤﺎ
ﺒﺭﺯﺕ ﻤﻭﻫﺒﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻔﻠﻙ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺠﺎﻨﺏ ﺸﻬﺭﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ،ﺍﺴﺘﺩﻋﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻁﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺠﻭﻗﻲ ﻝﺘﻌﺩﻴل ﺍﻝﺘﻘﻭﻴﻡ ،ﻭﻜﻠﻔﻪ ﺒﺒﻨﺎﺀ
ﺒﺭﺝ ﻓﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺼﻔﻬﺎﻥ ،ﻭﺇﻥ ﺇﺠﺎﺩﺘﻪ ﻝﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺭﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻝﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ﺒﻬﺎ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺤﺎﻓﺯﹰﺍ ﻝﻪ ﻝﻘﺭﺍﺀﺓ ﺸﻌﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻱ ﻓﻜﺎﻥ ﻝﻪ ﺍﻷﺜﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺸﻌﺭ
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻐﺔ ﻭﺃﺴﻠﻭﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻭﻤﻀﻤﻭﻨﹰﺎ ﻓﻠﻘﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﻜﻴﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺜﻘﺎﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺭﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻝﻌﺭﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻝﻘﺒﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺒﻴﻭﻥ ﺒﻤﻠﻙ ﺍﻝﺤﻜﻤﺔ.
ﻓﻲ ﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻗﺩﻡ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻝﺤل ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﺄﻝﻭﻓﺔ.
5
y
4 ﻝﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔx 3 − x 2 − 4x − 1 = 0 :
1
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﻋﻤﺭ ﺍﻝﺨﻴﺎﻡ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﺌﺩ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
3
= y
2 x
1 ﻭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . y = x 2 − x − 4
ﻴﻘﻭل ﻋﻤﺭ ﺍﻝﺨﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﺴﺏ ﺇﻝﻴﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺸﻌﺭ:
x
0
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5
-1 ﺕ ﻋﻤﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻜﺘﻨﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻘﻀـﺎﺀ
ﺃﻓﻨﻴ ﹸ
-2 ﻭﻜﺸﻑ ﻤﺎ ﻴﺤﺠﺒـﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨـﻔﺎﺀ
-3
ﻓﻠﻡ ﺃﺠـﺩ ﺃﺴـﺭﺍﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﻨﻘﻀـﻰ
ﻋﻤﺭﻱ ﻭﺃﺤﺴﺴﺕ ﺩﺒﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻔـﻨﺎﺀ
-4
-5
87
ا
ط اول
ax + b d d
= ) f ( xﻤﻊ c ≠ 0 ﺒﹻ: ∞− ; − ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∪ − c ; + ∞
cx + d c
( )
ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i ; j
2x + 1
= ) . f (x .1ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ c = 1 ، b = 1 ، a = 2ﻭ d = −1ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ
x −1
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺠﺩﻭل ﻭ ﺭﺍﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﻭﺭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) (C fﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
-1
-2
-3
∗ ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ،ﻤﻥ ﺨﻼل ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻭ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) ، (C fﺃﻥ ) f ( xﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻗﺭﻴﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 2ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺒﺸﺭﻁ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺄﺨﺫ xﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﻓﻲ .ﻨﻘﻭل ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ 2
lim f ( x ) = 2 ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞ +ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ:
∞x →+
∗ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ،ﻤﻥ ﺨﻼل ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) ، (C fﺃﻥ ) f ( xﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻗﺭﻴﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ
ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﻓﻲ .ﻨﻘﻭل ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ 2 ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺒﺸﺭﻁ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺄﺨﺫ ) ( −x ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 2
lim f ( x ) = 2 ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞ −ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ:
∞x →−
∗ ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻨﻪ ،ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞ ) +ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞ ، ( −ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻴﻘﺘﺭﺏ ﺘﺩﺭﻴﺠﻴﺎ ﻤﻥ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . y = 2ﻨﻘﻭل ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = 2ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻝﻤﺎ
ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞ ) +ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞.( −
−x + 2
= ) . f (x .2ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ c = 2 ، b = 2 ، a = −1ﻭ d = 3ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ
2x + 3
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺠﺩﻭل ﻭ ﺭﺍﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﻭﺭﻗﺘﻲ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻤﻤﺎﺜﻠﺔ ﻝﺘﻠﻙ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺠﺯﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) . (C fﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ؟
.3ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﺒﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ c ، b ، aﻭ . d
) . lim f ( x ﻭ ) lim f ( x ﺨﻤﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻤﺔ: •
∞x →− ∞x →+
ﺤﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻤﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞+ •
) ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞.( −
88
ا
ط ا
1
= ) f (x ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]−∞ ; a[ ∪ ]a ; +ﺒﹻ
x −a
( )
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i ; j
1
= ) . f (x
.1ﻨﻔﺭﺽ a = 0ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ
x
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺠﺩﻭل ﻭ ﺭﺍﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﻭﺭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) (C fﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ:
∗ ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ،ﻤﻥ ﺨﻼل ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻭ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) ، (C fﺃﻥ ) f ( xﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ
ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺒﺸﺭﻁ ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ xﻤﻭﺠﺒﺎ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻭﻗﺭﻴﺒﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . 0ﻨﻘﻭل ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ∞+
∞lim f ( x ) = +
>
ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ 0ﺒﻘﻴﻡ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ:
x →0
∗ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ،ﻤﻥ ﺨﻼل ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) ، (C fﺃﻥ −f ( x ) ﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ
ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺒﺸﺭﻁ ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ xﺴﺎﻝﺒﺎ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻭﻗﺭﻴﺒﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . 0ﻨﻘﻭل ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
∞lim f ( x ) = −
<
ﻫﻲ ∞ −ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ 0ﺒﻘﻴﻡ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ:
x →0
∗ ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻨﻪ ،ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ، 0ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻴﻘﺘﺭﺏ ﺘﺩﺭﻴﺠﻴﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) x = 0ﻤﺤﻭﺭ
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ(.ﻨﻘﻭل ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ x = 0ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C f
.2ﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ . a
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺠﺩﻭل ﻭ ﺭﺍﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﻭﺭﻗﺘﻲ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻤﻤﺎﺜﻠﺔ ﻝﺘﻠﻙ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺠﺯﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) (C fﻭ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻡ
ﻝﹻ xﻗﺭﻴﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ . a
. lim
>
) f (x ﻭ ) lim f ( x
<
ﺨﻤﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻤﺔ: •
x
→a x →a
89
↵ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﻴﺔ
ax + b d d
= ) f ( xﻤﻊ c ≠ 0ﻭ . ad − bc ≠ 0 ﺒﹻ: ∞− ; − ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∪ − c ; + ∞
cx + d c
ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ.
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ
:ا
ا
fدا
.
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = y 0ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ
ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ ) +ﻋﻨﺩ ∞ ( −ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ .( lim f ( x ) = y 0 ) lim f ( x ) = y 0
∞x →− ∞x →+
ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :2ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻴﻘﺒل ،ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞ +ﻭ ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞ ، −ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ
a
= .y ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ
c
3x + 1
= ) . f (x ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]−∞ ; − 2[ ∪ ]−2; +ﺒﹻ
2x + 4
3 3
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ lim f ( x ) = :ﻭ = ) . lim f ( x
∞x →+ 2 ∞x →− 2
3
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ = yﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻭ ∞. +
2
.2ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ
1 1 1 1
lim = −∞ ، lim = ∞+ ، lim = ∞− ، lim ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ= +∞ :1
→a x − a
<
x >
x →a x − a x <
→0 x x >
→0 x
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ x = x 0ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ
limﺃﻭ ∞lim f ( x ) = −
> >
ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ∞f ( x ) = +
x →x 0 x
→x 0
ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :2ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ
d
x =−
c
1
= ) . f (x ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]−∞ ; − 3[ ∪ ]−3; +ﺒﹻ
x +3
1 1
. lim = −∞ ، lim ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ= +∞ :
<
x → −3 x + 3 >
x →−3 x + 3
90
−x
= ) f ( xﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ. ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :1ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [ 0; +ﺒﹻ
x +1
.1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ . +ﺃﻋﻁ ﺘﻔﺴﻴﺭﺍ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ.
.2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ .ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = −1ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C f
ﺤل:
−1
= ) . lim f ( xﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = −1ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞. + .1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ = −1
∞x →+ 1
) −1( x + 1) − 1( − x −x − 1 + x −1
= ) . f ′(x = = .2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ [∞ ، [ 0; +
)( x + 1 )( x + 1 )( x + 1
2 2 2
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ . f ( 0 ) = 0 ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ [∞ f ′ ( x ) < 0 ، [ 0; +ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ . [ 0; +
2
y
1
x 0 ∞+
) f (x
′ -
0
x
0
-1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
) f (x
−1
-1
-2
−4
= ) f ( xﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ. ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :2ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ −1;1[ ∪ ]1;3ﺒﹻ
x −1
.1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ . 1ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ؟
.2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ .ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ x = 1ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C f
ﺤل:
1
× . f ( x ) = −4 .1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ ]، [ −1;1[ ∪ ]1;3
x −1
1 1
limﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﻀﺭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ) ( −4ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ: limﻭ ∞= + ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ= −∞ :
>
x →1 x − 1 <
x →1 x − 1
4
= ) . f ′ ( xﺇﺫﻥ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [ [ −1;1ﻭ ]. ]1;3 .2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ ]، [ −1;1[ ∪ ]1;3
)( x − 1
2
y
2 ∞−
91
↵ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﻴﺔ
.1ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل:
2x + 1
= ) f (x ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]−∞ ; − 2[ ∪ ]−2; +ﺒﹻ:
x +2
( )
ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i ; j
• ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ:
2 2
ﻭ =2 = ) . lim f ( x ∗ lim f ( x ) = = 2
∞x →+ 1 ∞x →− 1
1
. f ( x ) = ( 2x + 1) ﻝﻨﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ : x + 2 ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ ) f ( xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل : ∗
x +2
x ∞− −2 ∞+
ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ x + 2 - 0 +
1
x → −2
. lim
<
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ∞f ( x ) = +
lim
x < xlimﻭ ∞ = −
→ −2 x + 2 →−2
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ( 2x + 1) = −3
1
. lim
<
x → −2
limﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ∞f ( x ) = −
x > xlimﻭ ∞ = +
→ −2 x + 2 →−2
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ( 2x + 1) = −3
• ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ :ﻴﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = 2ﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ
ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . x = −2
)2 ( x + 2 ) − 1( 2x + 1 3
= ) . f ′(x = • ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ [∞ ، ]−∞ ; − 2[ ∪ ]−2; +
)( x + 2 )( x + 2
2 2
.2ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ
ax + b d d
= ) f ( xﻤﻊ c ≠ 0 ﺒﹻ: ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ −∞ ; − c ∪ − c ; + ∞
cx + d
d a
ﻭ ad − bc ≠ 0ﻗﻁﻌﺎ ﺯﺍﺌﺩﺍ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﺎ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ = yﻭ . x = −
c c
92
2 − 5x
= ) f ( xﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ. ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {−1ﺒﹻ
x +1
7
. f (x ) = a + .1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ aﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ }، ℝ − {−1
x +1
.2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ +∞ ، −ﻭ . 1ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ) (C fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ.
.3ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ.
ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C f .4
ﺤل:
.1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﺜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ f ( 0 ) = 2ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ f ( 0 ) = a + 7ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ a + 7 = 2ﺃﻱ . a = −5
7
. f ( x ) = −5 + ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ }، ℝ − {−1
x +1
∗ .2ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ lim f ( x ) = −5ﻭ . lim f ( x ) = −5
∞x →+ ∞x →+
1
× . f ( x ) = −5 + 7ﻝﻨﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ : x − 1 ∗ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ }، ℝ − {−1
x +1
x ∞− −1 ∞+
ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ x + 1 - 0 +
1
. lim ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﻀﺭﺏ ﻓﻲ 7ﻭ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ −5ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ∞f ( x ) = − lim ∞ = −
x → −1 <
x <
→ −1 x + 1
1
. lim>
x → −1
f ( x ) = ∞+ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﺤﺼل − 5 ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻭ 7 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻀﺭﺏ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻭ lim
x > ∞ = +
→ −1 x + 1
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ) ( x ′xﻤﻌﺎ ﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = −5ﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ
ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ) ( y ′yﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . x = −1
7
. f ′(x ) = − .3ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ }، ℝ − {−1
)( x + 1
2
3
2
-10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 - -
-1
-2
−5 ∞+
) f (x
-3
-4
-5
-8
-10
-11
-12
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺒﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) f ( 0ﻭ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) (C fﻤﻊ ) ( x ′x
-13
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﺒﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . f ( x ) = 0
-14
93
ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ
3x − 3
= ) f (x ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [ 0; +ﺒﹻ
x +1
ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ.
b
. f (x ) = a + .1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ aﻭ bﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ [∞ ، [ 0; +
x +1
.2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ [ 0; +ﺜﻡ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ.
.3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل.
.4ﺒﺭﺭ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C f
.5ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C f
.6ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x > 5ﻓﺈﻥ . 2 < f ( x ) < 3
.7ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ x + 1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . 3x − 3
94
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻁ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ،ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻤﻨﺤﻥ
95
ﻤﻭﻀﻭﻉ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
2x − 4
= ) . f (x fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {3ـ :
x −3
( )
ﻴﺭﻤﺯ ) (Cﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i ; J
(1أ ـ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ .
ب ـ ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐ ﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ .
(2ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) (Cﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ
(3ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ Tﻭ ' Tﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . −2
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ Tﻭ ' . T
(4ﺃﺭﺴﻡ Tﻭ ' Tﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C
)( x − 3
2
2
1
(4ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 x
-1
-2
-3
96
ﻤﻭﻀﻭﻉ ﻤﻊ ﺇﺭﺸﺎﺩﺍﺕ
2x − 5
= ) . f (x fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {−2ـ :
x +2
( )
ﻴﺭﻤﺯ ) (Cﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i ; J
.1أ ـ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ .
ب ـ ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐ ﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ
.2ﻋ ﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻤﻊ ﺤﺎﻤل ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل
.3ﻋ ﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ Tﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . 0
.4ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ T :ﻭ ) . (C
.5ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ∆ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ 3x + y − 2 = 0 :ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩﻫﻤﺎ .
ﺇﺭﺸﺎﺩﺍﺕ
.1ﺃ ـ ﻝﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺃﻭل ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﻜل ﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺜﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ∞ −ﻭ ∞ +ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺩ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ؛ ﻭﻋﻨﺩ −2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ . x + 2
ﺏ ـ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐ ﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻭ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺜﻡ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ .
.2ﻝﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ Cﻤﻊ ﺤﺎﻤل ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻴﺠﺏ ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . f ( x ) = 0
97
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻤﺔ ﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ 5 ر!
) lim f ( xﻭ ﺃﻜﹼﺩ ﺇﻥ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ 1ـ ت ا
وال ا
∞x →+
ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﹰﺎ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل. ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]0; +ﺒﹻ : 1
2x + 6 1− x
= )f ( x
1
= )f ( x (2 f ( x ) = + 1 (1
1 − 2x x x
= )f ( x
1
− 3 (4 = )f ( x
x +1
(3 ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ.
x+2 0,5 x − 1 .1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ . +ﺃﻋﻁ ﺘﻔﺴﻴﺭﺍ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ
−2 x 1
= )f ( x − 1 (6 = )f ( x (5 ﻝﻠﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ.
x−2 x+2
1+ x −4 .2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ .ﺃﺭﺴﻡ
= )f ( x (8 = )f ( x (7
1− x x+3 ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = −1ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C f
−x 0, 01x
= )f ( x 3 (10 = )f ( x (9 fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ " ﻤﻘﻠﻭﺏ " ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ℝ 2
2x −1 x+2
6ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) lim f ( xﻭ ﺃﻜﹼﺩ ﺇﻥ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
∞x →−
lim f ( x ) (2 lim f ( x ) (1
fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﹰﺎ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ∞x →+ ∞x →−
x −3
2
5x − 6 5 − 2x a=0 = ) ; f (x (4
lim ، lim x
x →1 1 − x x →4 x − 4
2x + 5
2x − 4 3x − 4 a = −2 = ) ; f (x (5
lim ، lim x +2
x →−2 − x − 2 x →2 2 − x
x +3
3x + 6 x a=4 = ) ; f (x (6
lim ، lim x −4
x →6 x − 6 3 4x + 3
x →−
4 ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞− 4
f 8ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]−∞;1[ ∪ ]1; +ﺒـ: ﺜﻡ ﺇﻝﻰ ∞ +ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
x +1 5x − 1 2x −1
= )f ( x = )f ( x (2 = )f ( x (1
x −1 2x − 2 x +1
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = 1ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ x −1 −2 x
= )f ( x (4 = )f ( x (3
x−3 1− x
ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
1
f 9ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ; +∞ ﺒـ:
2
98
2ـ درا دا
x−3
= )f ( x
13ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {−1ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺠﺩﻭل 2x −1
1
ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ: = yﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ
2
x ∞− -1 ∞+ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
0 ∞+ f 10ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ]−∞ ; 2ﺒـ:
)f ( x x
= )f ( x
2− x
∞− 0
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = −1ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ. ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
.2ﺃﻋﻁ ﺘﻔﺴﻴﺭﺍ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ. 1
f 11ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ − ﺍﻝﺸﻜل
2
14ﻨﻔﺱ ﺃﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ 13ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ
ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻫﻭ ) (Cﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ
ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]−∞ ; 2[ ∪ ]2; + y
ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
4
3
x ∞− -2 ∞+
2
∞+ 2
1
)f ( x
2 ∞− -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 x
-1
$%# 15ر!.
-2
fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ -3
2
f ( x) = 2 − } ℝ − {−2ﺤﻴﺙ :
x+2 ﺒﻘﺭﺍﺀﺓ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ
1ـ ﺃ -ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻭ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞+
ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺜﻡ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ f
ﻓﺴﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ.
12ﻨﻔﺱ ﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ 11
ﺏ -ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ . -2ﻓﺴﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ y
ـ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 x
ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ. -1
99
.1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺘﺎ .ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ 16ﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺤﺩﻯ ﺍﻝﻭﺭﺸﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﻼﻤﺎ .ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁﺔ
ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C ) CM ( xﺒﹻ DAﻝﺼﻨﻊ ﻜﻤﻴﺔ xﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ ﻫﻲ:
.2ﺃ ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻲ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻤﻊ x>0 = ) CM ( xﺤﻴﺙ
5 x + 100
x
ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ .
.1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻨﻪ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ) CM ( xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل :
ﺏ ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل
b
ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ).(-1 CM ( x ) = a +
x
ﺠـ ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺤﻴﺙ aﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ.
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ 0ﻭ 2 .2ﺃ -ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ C Mﻋﻨﺩ ∞ . +ﺃﻋﻁ ﺘﻔﺴﻴﺭﺍ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺁﺨﺭ
.3ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻴﺎ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ.
$%# 19ر!. ﺏ -ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ C Mﻋﻨﺩ 0ﺜﻡ ﻓﺴﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ.
fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ .3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) C 'M ( xﻭ ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞. ]0;+
= )f ( x
x +1
} ℝ − {2ﺤﻴﺙ : .4ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ . CM
−x + 2
.5ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل
ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . C M
ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ. $%# 17ر!.
.1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
.2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻲ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ 2 x −1
= )f ( x } ℝ − {−1ﺤﻴﺙ :
ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ. x +1
.3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺩﻫﻤﺎ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ .3 ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ .1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
ﺍﻝﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ 1ﻭ . 3 .2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ .
) (C .4ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ B ، A .3ﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ
$%# 20ر!. ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ . -2 ، 0ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) f '(0ﻭ ) ، f '(−2ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ) (Cﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ . B ، A
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭ } ℝ − {1ﺤﻴﺙ : ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ
x 1 .4ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ ﺜﻡ ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ) . (C
= )f ( x f ( x) = − x 2ﻭ
1− x 2 $%#ر!. 18
) (C fﻭ ) (C gﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ
fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . −x + 2
= )f ( x } ℝ − {1ﺤﻴﺙ :
.1ﺃ -ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ . g x −1
ﺏ-ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C g ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
.2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ) (C fﻭ ) (C g ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ
.3ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ) (C fﻭ ) . (C g
100
y
21ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ﺠﺩﺍﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺜﻼﺙ ﺩﻭﺍل h ، g ، f
3 ) (Γ
2
x ∞− 1 ∞+
1
-3 ∞+
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 x )f ( x
-1 ∞− -3
-2
-3
∞+ 5
5 )g ( x
) (γ 1
4
3
x ∞− 3 ∞+
2
∞+ 0
1
) h( x
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 x 0 ∞−
-1
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺩ
x ∞− 0 ∞+ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻫﺩﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ.
.2ﺃﻋﻁ ﺘﻔﺴﻴﺭﺍ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻝﻜل ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ.
∞+ 2
.3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ
) f (x
ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل h ، g ، fﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻭﺠﻭﺩﻫﺎ.
2 ∞−
22ﺇﻝﻴﻙ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﺜﻼﺙ ﺩﻭﺍل ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ
∞− -1 ∞+ ﺠﺩﺍﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ.ﺃﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻝﻪ.
x
y
0 ∞+ 4 ) (C
) g (x
∞− 0 3
2
x ∞− -2 ∞+
1
∞+ 1
-4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 x
) h( x -1
-3
101
.2ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {2ﺒـ: .ر! )ّ*+ـّـ'.
5x − 4 23ﺃﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﻤﻨﺤﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ
= )f ( x
x−2 ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
β
α+ ﺃ -ﺍﻜﺘﺏ ) f ( xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ، f 2 ( x) = 2 −
5
، f1 ( x) = 3 −
1
cx + d x −1 x +1
ﺏ -ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ]−∞ ; 2ﺜﻡ 3 2
، f 4 ( x ) = −4 + = )، f3 ( x −1
x+4 x−4
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ . ] 2; +
−1 2
= )f 6 ( x −3 ، f5 ( x) = 2 +
.3ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﺭﺴﻤﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ f x+5 x−5
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـg ( x) = x 2 : y
9
102
ﺏ -ﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ ./.ـ-ـ.,
ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ . Cg 26ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺒﻠﺩ ﻴﺯﺩﺍﺩﻭﻥ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺤﻴﺙ:
. IIﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ: 7 x + 200
= )f ( x
(E) ....... 2 x 3 − 3x 2 − 3x + 2 = 0 x + 20
.1ﺃ -ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ )(Eﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل: ﺤﻴﺙ xﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺠﺎﺭﻴﺔ ﻤﻨﺫ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺴﻨﺔ 1960
) f ( x) = g ( x ﻭ ) f ( xﻤﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺒﻤﻼﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ
ﺏ -ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﻼ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ).(E .1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺴﻨﺔ 1960؟ ﻓﻲ 1970؟
.2ﺃ -ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Eﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل: .2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ : x
) . h( x ) = k ( x 60
= )f ( x +7
ﺏ -ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﻼ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ).(E x + 20
.3ﺃ -ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . 2 x 2 + x − 1 = 0 .3ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ . [ 0; +
)( x − 2 ) ( 2 x 2 + x − 1 ﺏ -ﺍﻨﺸﺭ : .4ﻫل ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺒﻠﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ ﺃﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺘﺭﺍﺠﻊ؟ ﺒ ﺭﺭ.
ﺠـ -ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ).(E .5ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . f ( x) = 8
.1 28ﺜﻤﻥ ﺒﻀﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﻭ . 120 DAﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺜﻤﻥ ﻋﺭﻑ .6ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ، fﺤﺩﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺴﻨﺔ
ﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎ ﻤﻔﺎﺠﺌﺎ ﺒﻨﺴﺒﺔ 25%ﺜﻡ ﺍﻨﺨﻔﺎﻀﺎ ﺒﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ 2008ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗل ﻤﻥ 8ﻤﻼﻴﻴﻥ ﻨﺴﻤﺔ.
.y %ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻀﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺠﺩﻴﺩ . 120 DA 27ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ Ch ، Cg ، C f
ﺒﻭﻀﻊ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺜﻡ ﺤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ . y ﻭ Ckﻝﻠﺩﻭﺍل h ، g ، fﻭ kﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒـ :
.2ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻤﺔ ،ﺜﻤﻥ Pﻝﺒﻀﺎﻋﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭ ﻴﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎ 3x − 2
= )، g ( x ، f ( x) = x 2
ﺒﻨﺴﺒﺔ x %ﺜﻡ ﺍﻨﺨﻔﺎﻀﺎ ﺒﻨﺴﺒﺔ . y %ﻴﻌﻭﺩ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ 2x − 3
ﺍﻷﺼﻠﻴﺔ . P 2 1
ﻭ k ( x) = x 2 + x − 1 h( x ) = x 3 −
100 x 3 3
=.y ﺒﺈﻋﻁﺎﺀ ﺘﻔﺼﻴل ﻝﻠﺤﺴﺎﺒﺎﺕ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ : y
x + 100
5
100 x
= )f ( x 3
x + 100
ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Cﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ
2
) . (O; i, jﺍﻝﻭﺤﺩﺓ 1cm :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل 5ﻭﺤﺩﺍﺕ. 1
10000
. f ( x) = 100 − ﺃ -ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ: -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 x
x + 100
ﺏ -ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ] [ 0;100ﻭ ﺸﻜل
-1
ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ.
-2
ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ .0
.1 .Iﺃ -ﺃﻋﻁ ﺠﺩﻭﻝﻲ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ . k
ﺩ -ﺍﺭﺴﻡ Tﻭ ) . (C
ﺏ -ﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ C fﻭ Ckﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل.
2
.4ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ . y = x .2ﺃ -ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) h '( xﺤﻴﺙ ' hﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ، hﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل
3
ﺃ -ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻲ xﻭ. y ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . h
ﺏ -ﺒﻴﻥ ،ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﺡ ﻜﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻲ xﻭy ﺏ -ﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ Chﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل.
ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ؟ .3ﺃ -ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝـ xﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ؟
103
ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺩﺩ
31ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜل ﻤﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ: 29ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒـ:
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 2− x
= )f ( x
x+5
x + 100
= )f ( x } ℝ − {500ﺒـ : ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻤﻥ ﻀﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﻤﻊ
500 − x
-1ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = −1 ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺭﻴﺭ
ﺃ -ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ }. ℝ − {5
-2ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ x = −500
ﺏ -ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎﻝﻴﻥ
-3ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ :
[ ]−∞ ; − 5ﻭ [∞ . ]−5; +
400
f ( x) = 1 +
500 − x ﺠـ -ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ .
-4ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎﻥ ﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩ -ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻻ ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل.
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ). (500; −1 ﻫـ -ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻭ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ.
ﻭ-ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ 0ﻫﻲ
-5ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ 0 < x < 500ﻓﺈﻥ:
7 2
1 . y =− x+
< )f (500) < f ( x 25 5
5
30ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
-6ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻨﻌﺩﻡ ﻤﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل.
} ℝ − {0,5ﺒـ:
32ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜل ﻤﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ: 1− x
= )f ( x
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒـ : x − 0,5
7 ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺭﺍﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ
f ( x ) = −1 +
)2( x − 2 ﺍﻷﻗل ،ﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺭﻴﺭ.ﺏ-
-1ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ }ℝ − {1 ﺃ -1 -ﻫﻭ ﺤل ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x) = 0
= )f ( x
−2 x + 11
-2ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ : ﺏ f '( x) > 0 -ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ
2x + 4 1
.
-3ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ x = 2 2
0, 5
-4ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]2; +ﻭ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ = )f ( x 2
ﺠـ -ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ ﺒـ :
)( x − 0,5
ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [. ]−∞ ; 2
ﺩ -ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎﻝﻴﻥ
-5ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ 1 1
−∞ ; ﻭ . ; + ∞
. −
14
ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ 1ﻫﻭ 2 2
9 ﻫـ -ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ
1 5
-6ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ 3 < x < 5ﻓﺈﻥ < ) . < f ( x y = −1ﻜﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ.
6 2
ﻭ -ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ
11
-7ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ . 0; ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ .-2
4
104
ﺍﻝﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻬﺩﻓﺔ
ﺇﺠﺭﺍﺀ ﻤﺤﺎﻜﺎﺓ ﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ﺒﺴﻴﻁﺔ ﻭ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ ﺘﻁﻭﺭ ﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ
ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺘﺠﺔ .
ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﻠﻕ ﺒﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﻨﺘﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻁ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻱ
ﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ .
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﺤﺩﺙ ﺸﺭﻁ ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﺤﺩﺙ ﺁﺨﺭ .
ﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﺸﺠﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺤﺔ .
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺃﺸﺠﺎﺭ ﻤﺭﺠﺤﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻴﺔ .
ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﻼل ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ .
ﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﺸﺠﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﻤﺘﻁﺎﺒﻘﺔ
ﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ
ﻋﻨﺩ ﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻨﺔ ،ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺔ ﺘﺅﻜﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻝﻠﻭﺠﻪ ﺤﻅﺎ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺤﻅﻴﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﻭﺩ
ﻤﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﺴﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﻤﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻭﻋﻨﺩ ﺭﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺭﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﺴﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﻤﺭﺘﻴﻥ...ﻫﺫﺍ
ﻤﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﺤﻅ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﻫﻭ ﻨﻔﺴﻪ ﺤﻅ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻅﻬﺭ ﻝﻜﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎ ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﺯﻡ ﺒﻬﺫﺍ ،ﺇﺫ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻥ
ﻻ ﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﺃﺒﺩﺍ ! ...
ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺸﻲﺀ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﺤﺠﺭ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ .ﻝﻠﺭﻗﻡ 5ﻤﺜﻼ ﺤﻅ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ 6ﺤﻅﻭﻅ ﻜﻲ ﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺴﺘﺔ
ﺭﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﺴﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 5ﻤﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎ ،ﻝﻜﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺨﻼل ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﺘﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﻴﻅﻬﺭ
ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 5ﻭ ﻝﻭ ﻤﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ !...
ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺸﻜﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺭﻫﺎ ﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻭ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ .
ﻗﺎل ﺃﻭﻨﺩﺭﻱ ﻜﻭﻝﻤﻭﻏﻭﺭﻭﻑ ) ( 1987 – 1903
" :ﺇﻥ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺒﻴﺴﺘﻤﻭﻝﻭﺠﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻴﺭﺘﻜﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺴﺎﺱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻅﻭﺍﻫﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ﺠﺩﺍ ﺘﻭﻝﹼﺩ ﺍﻝﺼﺭﺍﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﻀﺒﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ﺘﺘﻼﺸﻰ ﺒﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﺎ " .
105
ا
ط اول
ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﺤﺠﺭ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺠل ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻱ .
(1ﻤﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ؟
(2ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﺤﺠﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﺭﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻤﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺘﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺠل ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﺭﺓ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ.
-ﻤﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺘﺠﺔ ؟
(3ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﺤﺠﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﺭﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺜﻼﺙ ﺭﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺠل ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﺭﺓ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ.
-ﻤﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺘﺠﺔ ؟
ا
ط ا
ا
ط ا
ﺤﺠﺭ ﻨﺭﺩ ﺃﻭﺠﻬﻬﺎ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ . 3 ، 2 ، 2 ، 1 ، 1 ، 0ﻴﺭﻤﻴﻪ ﻻﻋﺏ ﺭﻤﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺘﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻴﺴﺠل ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻅﺎﻫﺭ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺭﻤﻴﺔ Y ، X .ﻻﻋﺒﺎﻥ .ﻴﺭﻴﺩ Xﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺭﺒﺤﻪ ﻫﻭ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ
) ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭ ( ﻭﻴﺭﻴﺩ Yﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺭﺒﺤﻪ ﻫﻭ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ .
(1ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻨﻲ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ Xﻭ . Y
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ Xﻭ . Y
(3ﺃﻱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﺒﺤﺔ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﻝﺼﺎﺤﺒﻬﺎ ؟
106
ا
ط ا
ا
ﻓﻲ ﺜﺎﻨﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﺎ 25 % ،ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﺍﻫﻡ ﻀﻌﻴﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ 15 %ﻤﻨﻬﻡ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﺍﻫﻡ ﻀﻌﻴﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻔﻠﺴﻔﺔ
ﻭ 10 %ﻤﺴﺘﻭﺍﻫﻡ ﻀﻌﻴﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺩﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎ .ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻭﻴﺔ :
(1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﺍﻩ ﻀﻌﻴﻔﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻔﻠﺴﻔﺔ ،ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﺍﻩ ﻀﻌﻴﻔﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ ؟
(2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﺍﻩ ﻀﻌﻴﻔﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ،ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﺍﻩ ﻀﻌﻴﻔﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻔﻠﺴﻔﺔ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ ؟
(3ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻯ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻀﻌﻴﻔﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻔﻠﺴﻔﺔ ؟
ا
ط ا
ﻴﻀﻡ ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻨﻘﺩﻴﺔ .ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻴﺔ ) ﺘﺤﻤل ﻭﺠﻪ ﻭﻅﻬﺭ ( ﻭ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺘﺤﻤل ﻭﺠﻬﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ ﻤﻐﺸﻭﺸﺔ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ
ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﻫﻭ . 3/1ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﻴﻬﺎ ﻤﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ل ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺠﻪ ) .ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻙ ﺘﺸﻜﻴل ﺸﺠﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ (
ا
ط ا
دس
ﻴﻀﻡ ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ 6ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ 3ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺨﻀﺭﺍﺀ ﻻ ﻨﻔﺭﻕ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺱ .
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ " Aﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ " ﻭ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ " Bﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺨﻀﺭﺍﺀ "
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) ، P ( A
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) PA ( Bﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺨﻀﺭﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻗﺩ ﺴﺤﺒﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ) P ( A ∩ Bﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺨﻀﺭﺍﺀ
(4ﻫل ) P ( A ∩ B ) = P ( A ) × P (B؟ ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ؟
ا
ط ا
ﻴﻀﻡ ﻜﻴﺱ ﺨﻤﺱ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 5ﻭ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 6ﺇﻝﻰ 8ﻭ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺨﻀﺭﺍﻭﻴﻥ ﻴﺤﻤﻼﻥ
ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ 9ﻭ . 10ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ .
-1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ " A :ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﺘﺤﻤﻼﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﻴﻥ " " B ،ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻠﻭﻥ "
" Cﺍﻝﻜﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﺘﺤﻤﻼﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻠﻭﻥ "
-ﻫل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﺎﻥ Aﻭ Bﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺘﺎﻥ ؟ ) ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﻫﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﺜﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ (
-2ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
" Dﺍﻝﻜﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻝﻭﻨﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻥ "
" Eﺍﻝﻜﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻝﻭﻨﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺘﺤﻤﻼﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﻴﻥ "
-3ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻨﺎ ﺴﺤﺒﻨﺎ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻝﻭﻨﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻥ .ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﺎﻫﻤﺎ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﻴﻥ ؟
107
↵ ﻤﺤﺎﻜﺎﺓ ﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ -ﺘﺫﺒﺫﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ
ﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ :
ﻨﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﺃﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺠﺯﻡ ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﻗﻁﻌﻴﺔ ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒل ﺇﻨﺠﺎﺯﻫﺎ.
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺴﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺍﻷﻨﺸﻁﺔ ،ﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺠﻬﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺤﻅﻭﻅ ﺍﻝﻅﻬﻭﺭ.
ﻋﻴﻨﺔ :ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻤﻘﺎﺴﻬﺎ ، nﻜل ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ n
ﻤﺭﺓ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻅﺭﻭﻑ.
ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺎﻜﺎﺓ :
ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻨﻨﺎ ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﺒﻤﺤﺎﻜﺎﺓ ﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ،ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻨﻤﻭﺫﺠﺎ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻭﺴﻨﺩﺍ ﻤﺎﺩﻴﺎ ﻨﺤﻘﻘﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝﻪ.
ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل )ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺠﺩﻭل(
ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ
ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭ
ﺍﻝﻌﻤل ﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ ﻫﻭ.30
ﻴﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻷﺴﺘﺎﺫ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﻴﻥ ) ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻤﻘﺎﺴﻬﺎ ( 20ﺜﻡ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺜﻠﺙ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ) ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻤﻘﺎﺴﻬﺎ ( 100ﻭ ﺃﺨﻴﺭﺍ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ
) ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻤﻘﺎﺴﻬﺎ ( 300ﻜﻲ ﻴﺘﻤﻡ ﻤﻊ ﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ 1 2 3 4
ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﺕ
ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻨﺔ 20
ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍﺕ
ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﺕ
ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻨﺔ 100
ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍﺕ
ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﺕ
ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻨﺔ 300
ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍﺕ
ﻴﻤﺜل ﺍﻷﺴﺘﺎﺫ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺜﻡ ﻴﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﻤﺜﻼ ﺒﺎﻝﺴﺅﺍل :ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ؟
ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺒﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﺴﺘﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻝﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ:
-ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﻥ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ
-ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻜﻠﹼﻤﺎ ﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻘﺎﺴﻬﺎ
108
ﻤﺤﺎﻜﺎﺓ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺩﻭل ﺇﻜﺴﺎل
. ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻨﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﻼﻴﺎ ﻤﻥ M1ﺇﻝﻰ Q4ﻭ ﻨﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل
ﻭﺃﺨﻴﺭﺍ :ﻨﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ F9ﻜﻲ ﻨﺸﺎﻫﺩ ﺘﺫﺒﺫﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍﺕ ﺘﺅﻭل ﺇﻝﻰ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ
ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺭﺍﺭ ) ﻭ ﻫﻭ ﺴﺒﻴل ﻤﻤﻜﻥ ﻝﻠﺘﻁﺭﻕ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻔﻬﻭﻡ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل (.
109
↵ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺒﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ﺤﺼﻠﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ nﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ . x n ، ......، x 2 ، x 1ﻜﺭﺭﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺍﺕ
ﺘﺌﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍﺕ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ
xi x1 ..... xn p n ، ......، p 2 ، p1ﺤﻴﺙ 0 ≤ p i ≤ 1 xi x1 ..... xn
..... .....
pi p1 pn
∑P
i
i =1 ﻭ fi f1 fn
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻴﻀﻡ ﻜﻴﺱ 5ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﺜﻠﺔ 3 ،ﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ) (Bﻭ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ) .(Nﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ Xﻋﺩﺩ
ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ،ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝـ Xﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
(1ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺯﺍﻤﻥ ) ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ( :ﻫﻨﺎ ﻻ ﻴﻬﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺴﻤﻭﺡ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻲ ﻫﻭ ، 10
1
xi 0 1 2 = )p (N ; N ) = p (X = 0 ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل }) {(N ; N ), (N ; B ), (B ; Bﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
10
pi 1 6 3 3 6
10 10 10 = )p (B ; B ) = p (X = 2 = )، p (N ; B ) = p (X = 1
10 10
(2ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ :ﻫﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻤﻬﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺴﻤﻭﺡ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻲ ﻫﻭ 20
) ﻝﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺩﻝﻴﻨﺎ 5ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻤﺎ ﺃﺭﺩﻨﺎ ﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻨﺠﺩ ﺃﻤﺎﻤﻨﺎ 4ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻝﻡ ﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﻝﻰ
2 1 2
xi 0 1 2 = × = )p (N ; N ) = p (X = 0 ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ( 5 × 4 = 20ﺇﺫﻥ
5 4 20
2 12 6 2 3 3 2 12
pi = × p ((N ; B ), (B ; N )) = p (X = 1) = × +
20 20 20 5 4 5 4 20
3 2 6
= × = )p (B ; B ) = p (X = 2
5 4 20
(3ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺠﺎﻉ :ﻫﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻤﻬﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﻤﺴﻤﻭﺡ ) ﻤﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻥ
ﺴﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺄﻤﺎﻤﻨﺎ 5ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﺭﺩﻨﺎ ﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻓﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻲ ( 5 × 5 = 25
2 3 3 2 12 2 2 4
= × p ((N ; B ), (B ; N )) = p ( X = 1) = × + = × = )، p ( N ; N ) = p ( X = 0
5 5 5 5 25 5 5 25
xi 0 1 2
3 3 9
4 12 9 = × = )p ( B ; B ) = p ( X = 2
pi 5 5 25
25 25 20
ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻝﻘﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ
n
ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻝﻘﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩل µﺤﻴﺙ µ = p1x 1 + p 2 x 2 + ..... + p n x n = ∑ Pi x i
i =1
n
=σ ،ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﻭ V ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻝﻘﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ Vﺤﻴﺙ ) V = ∑ Pi ( x i − µ
2
i =1
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ :ﻜﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺀ ﻴﻤﻴﺯ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ Vﺘﺸﺘﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩل µ
n
ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ Vﺒﺎﻝﺩﺴﺘﻭﺭ V = ∑ Pi x i2 − µ 2
i =1
ﺨﻭﺍﺹ :ﻋﻨﺩ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺜﺎﺒﺕ aﻝﻜل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ x iﻴﻀﺎﻑ aﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ .
110
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل : 1
ﻴﺤﻭﻱ ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ 5ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 5ﻻ ﻨﻔﺭﻕ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺱ .ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ 3ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺒﺎﻹﺭﺠﺎﻉ
) ﺃﻱ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻜل ﺴﺤﺒﺔ ﻨﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ( ﻨﺴﺠل ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﻝﻨﺤﺼل
ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ 5 ، 4 ، 3 ، 2 ، 1
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ؟
(2ﻨﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺓ ﻝﻜﻥ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ .ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ؟
-ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ " Aﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ " 4
ﺤل (1 :ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺌﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻵﺤﺎﺩ ) ﻫﻨﺎﻙ 5ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺌﺎﺕ ،ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل
ﻜل ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ 5ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻱ 25ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺸﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﻨﺎ 5ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻵﺤﺎﺩ (
ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ 5 × 5 × 5 = 125ﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﻤﻤﻜﻨﺎ
(2ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ 5 × 4 × 3 = 60ﻋﺩﺩﺍ ) ﺒﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ،ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﻻ ﺘﺭﺠﻊ (
-ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ Aﻴﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 4ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻝﻠﻌﺸﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺘﺒﻘﻰ 4ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺌﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻝﻜل ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺘﺒﻘﻰ 3
ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻵﺤﺎﺩ ﺃﻱ 4 × 3 = 12ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻼﺌﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ
pi
1 2 3 4 3 2 1 ∑p
i =1
i ﻭ =1
16 16 16 16 16 16 16
ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻫﻭ :
1 2 3 4 3 2 1 64
= )µ = × (−2) + × (0) + × (2) + × (4) + × (6) + × (8) + × (10 =4
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻼﻋﺏ Aﻫﻭ 4ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ .
ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ ﻝﻼﻋﺏ Bﻨﻁﺭﺡ 4ﻤﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ x iﻝﻼﻋﺏ Aﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﺃﻤل ﺭﺒﺤﻪ µ ′ = µ − 4 = 0
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻼﻋﺏ Bﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ﻻ ﻝﻪ ﻭ ﻻ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ (
111
↵ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻁﻴﺔ :
.1ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ Ωﺤﻴﺙ . p ( A ) ≠ 0ﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ Ωﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﺠﺩﻴﺩﺍ ﻴﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ p A
) p (A ∩ B
= ) p A (B ﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ Bﻨﻜﺘﺏ
) p (A
p Aﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻁﻲ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ Aﻤﺤﻘﻘﺔ
) p A (B ) = p (B / Aﻭ ﺘﻘﺭﺃ " ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل Bﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ Aﻤﺤﻘﻘﺔ "
ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻴﺤﻭﻱ 5ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﺒﺎﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ 8 ، 6 ، 4 ، 2 ، 0ﻭ 3ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﺒﺎﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ 5 ، 3 ، 1 ﻤﺜﺎل:
ﻻ ﻨﻤﻴﺯ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺱ .ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ
-ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﺯﻭﺠﻴﻴﻥ ؟
ﺍﻝﺤل:
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ Aﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ " ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﺯﻭﺠﻴﺎ " ﻭ Bﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ " ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﺎ "
5
ﻭﺍﻀﺢ ﺃﻥ = ) p ( Aﻭ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) p (A ∩ Bأي ) p (A ) × p (B / Aﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ
8
ﻝﻜﻥ ) p ( B / Aﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺴﺤﺏ ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﺯﻭﺠﻴﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻻ ﻴﺤﻭﻱ ﺇﻻ ﺃﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺯﻭﺠﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ 7ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ
4
= ) p (B / A ﺃﻱ
7
) PA ( F ) = P ( A ) × P ( A ∩ F ) PA ( F 5 4 5
= × = ) p (A ∩ B ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ
8 7 14
1
وF:
) P (A
2
ﺸﺠﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ :
A
1
1 P:"#$ ﻤﺜﺎل:
2
2
1 1 ﻴﻀﻡ ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻗﻁﻌﺘﻲ ﻨﻘﺩ .
2 3 وF:
) P (B
B -ﻗﻁﻌﺔ Aﻋﺎﺩﻴﺔ ) ﺘﺤﻤل ﻭﺠﻪ ﻭﻅﻬﺭ (
2 P:"#$ -ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ Bﻓﻤﻐﺸﻭﺸﺔ
3
) PB (P ) = P (B ) × P (B ∩ P ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﻫﻭ . 3/1
) PB ( P
ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ
ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﻴﻬﺎ ﻤﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .
-ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ :ﺍﻨﺠﺎﺯ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﻴﻭﻀﺢ ﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺘﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ .
ﺒﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ " Aﺭﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ " B ، " Aﺭﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ " F ، " Bﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺠﻪ " " P ،ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﺔ ﻅﻬﺭ "
) p ( Aﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺭﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ Aﺃﻤﺎ ) : p ( Fﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺠﻪ : p (P ) ،ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻅﻬﺭ
112
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل : 1
) ( C ) ، ( B ) ، ( Aﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺼﻨﺎﺩﻴﻕ ﺤﻴﺙ :
ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ) ( Aﻴﻀﻡ 3ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ 5ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ
ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ) ( Bﻴﻀﻡ ﻜﺭﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﻭﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ
ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ) ( Cﻴﻀﻡ ﻜﺭﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﻭﻴﻥ ﻭ 3ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ
ﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺎﺩﻴﻕ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻓﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺴﺤﺒﺕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ) ( A؟
&%
ااء Rو ا ا! داء Nو ('& ا ) #$%ا'*ة أو ا ( +, -(.ا: 12
3 R ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻨﻜﻭﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺃﺨﺫﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ) ( A
8
A 5
ﻭ ﺴﺤﺒﻨﺎ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻫﻭ P ( A ∩ R ) :
1 8
3
N 1 3 1
= × = ) P (A ∩ R
1 2 R 3 8 8
3 1 3
B ﻭ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺘﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ :
3
N 1 3 1 2 1 2 173
1 2
R = × P (R ) = × + × +
3 5 3 8 3 3 3 5 360
C 3
p (A ∩ R ) 1 173 173
5
N = ) p R (A ÷ = =
) p (R 8 360 45
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل : 2
ﻴﻀﻡ ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﻭﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺨﻀﺭﺍﺀ .ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ،ﻨﻌﻴﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻰ
ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻭ ﻨﻀﻴﻑ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﻨﻌﻴﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻤﻊ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﺜﻡ ﻨﻌﻴﺩ
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ ﻤﺭﺓ ﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ .ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
" Aﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ "
" Bﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺨﻤﺱ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ "
&%
2 :5ت ا7(8وق ( 3 ، 2 ) +4(5ا 1(., 12و= د آ> ;+,او; و @Aث آات BCاء 1Dا7(8وق .
3 ) ( 3;4 .
2
ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻫﻭ
6 5
2 ) ( 3;3 3
5 6 ) ( 4;3 ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻴﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﺒﺎﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) . ( 3 ، 3
) ( 3;2 .
3
ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺨﻀﺭﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻫﻭ
3 2 ( 4;3 ) 5
5 ) ( 4;2 6
4
ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻴﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﺒﺎﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) . ( 4 ، 2
6 ) ( 5;2 ﻨﻠﺨﺹ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل :
2 3 3 2 2
= × P (A ) = × + ﻴﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ) ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺅﺩﻴﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) ( 4 ، 3
5 6 5 6 5
3 4 2
= × = ) P (B ﻭ ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻨﺠﺩ :
5 6 5
113
↵ ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ
ﻨﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺃﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ
)p(A ∩ B) = p(A) × p(B
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ p(A) ≠ 0ﻓﺈﻥ )p(B/A) = p(B
ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﻫﻤﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻤﻪ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺅﺜﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ .
ﻤﺜﺎل: 1
ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﻭﺩ ﻤﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺘﻴﻥ .ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻻ ﺘﺅﺜﺭ ﺒﺤﺎل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺤﻭﺍل ﻓﻲ ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ
ﺇﺫﻥ :ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺘﻴﻥ .
ﺭﻤﻲ ﺤﺠﺭ ﻨﺭﺩ nﻤﺭﺓ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ .ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻜل ﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺘﺘﺄﺜﺭ ﺒﺤﺎل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺤﻭﺍل ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ
ﺇﺫﻥ :ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺤﺎﺩﺙ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻤﺜﻰ ﻤﺜﻰ .
ﻤﺜﺎل : 2ﻝﺒﻨﻰ ﻭ ﻤﺭﻭﺓ ﺃﺨﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺠﺘﻬﺩﺘﺎﻥ ﺘﺤﻀﺭﺍﻥ ﻨﻔﺴﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻻﻤﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺸﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﺒﻜﺎﻝﻭﺭﻴﺎ ﺒﻜل ﺠﺩ .
ﻗﺎل ﺍﻷﺴﺘﺎﺫ ﻷﺒﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺸﻙ ﺃﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺴﺘﻨﺠﺤﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻤﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺸﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﺒﻜﺎﻝﻭﺭﻴﺎ – ﺇﻥ ﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﷲ – ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺤﺼﻭل ﻝﺒﻨﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ ﺠﻴﺩ ﻫﻭ 0,9ﺃﻤﺎ ﻤﺭﻭﺓ ﻓﻬﻭ . 0,5
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ " Lﺘﺤﺼل ﻝﺒﻨﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ ﺠﻴﺩ " " M ،ﺘﺤﺼل ﻤﺭﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ ﺠﻴﺩ "
(1ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺤﺼﻭل ﺍﻷﺨﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ ﺠﻴﺩ .
ﻫﻭ :ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ Lﻭ Mﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ p ( L ∩ M ) = p ( L ) × p ( M ) = 0,9 × 0,5 = 0, 45
(2ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺤﺼﻭل ﺇﺤﺩﻯ ﺍﻷﺨﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ ﺠﻴﺩ .
ﻫﻭ p ( L ∩ M ) ∪ ( L ∩ M ) = p ( L ) × p (M ) + p ( L ) × p ( M ) = 0,9 × 0,5 + 0,1× 0,5 = 0, 50 :
ﻷﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﻼل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ Lﻭ Mﻴﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﻼل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ ) . (L ∩ M ) ، (L ∩ M
(3ﺃﺏ ﺍﻷﺨﺘﻴﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺠﺩﺍ ،ﻗﺎل ﻻ ﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﻤﺎ ﻴﺨﺒﺌﻪ ﻝﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﻐﺩ ،
0, 9 L ﻓﻠﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺸﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﺒﻜﺎﻝﻭﺭﻴﺎ ﺃﺼﻼ ﻫﻭ . 0,9
BAC ﺒﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺘﻭﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺴﺘﺎﺫ ،
0, 9 0,1 L
-ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺤﺼﻭل ﺍﻷﺨﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ ﺠﻴﺩ :
ﻭ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﺠﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻫﻭ
0, 5 M
0, 9
) p [(B ∩ L ) ∩ (B ∩ M )] = p (B ∩ L ) × p (B ∩ M
BAC
0, 5 = 0,9 × 0,9 × 0,9 × 0,5 = 0,3645
M
ا)&,-
: "+ ا)('" " :وة
114
ﻴﻀﻡ ﻜﻴﺱ ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ . ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل : 1
ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺘﺎﻥ ؟ B1ﻭ B 2 ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ .ﻫﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﺛﺘﺎﻥ -1
" B 2ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ " " ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ " ، B1
ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺘﺎﻥ ؟ B1ﻭ B 2 ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺠﺎﻉ .ﻫﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﺛﺘﺎﻥ -2
&%
4 3 1 4 3 8 4 44 1 4 1
= × = ) p (B1 ∩ B 2 ، = × p (B 2 ) = × + = ، p (B 1 ) = = (1
12 11 11 12 11 12 11 132 3 12 3
1 1 1
56ن ا
4د B1 0123و 012892 "17 B 2 +أن × ≠
11 3 3
4 4 1 4 4 8 4 48 1 4 1
= ) p (B1 ∩ B 2 = × = × ، p (B 2 ) = × + = ) = ، p (B1 = (2
12 12 9 12 12 12 12 144 3 12 3
1 1 1
+أن × = 56ن ا
4د B1 0123و 2892 B 2ن
9 3 3
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل : 2
ﻴﻀﻡ ﻜﻴﺱ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻜﺭﺍﺘﻴﻥ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﻭﻴﻥ .
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ .
" Nآ"ة > ,8ا)آ " &"+اء " ، " Mﺍﻝﻜﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﺎ ﺍﻝﻠﻭﻥ " ﻧﻌﺘﱪ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :
(1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍ ﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﺜﻨﺘﻴﻥ ،ﻫل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﺎﻥ Mﻭ Nﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺘﺎﻥ ؟
(2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍ ﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ،ﻫل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﺎﻥ Mﻭ Nﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺘﺎﻥ ؟
&%
(1ة اB+-ء Bو ة ااء R
* Iا%رج ا( ه: 1
}) E = {(B , B );(B , R );(R , B ); (R , R
Oض أن ا Mن ا.ف !2 E JIوي ا2>Rل P47(I (7 ،
1 3 3 3 2 1
= × = ) p (M ) × p (N = ) p (Nو (S = = ) ، p (M
2 4 8 4 4 2
2 1
= = ) p (A ∩ B إذن و M ∩ N = {(B , R ); (R , B )} (7
4 2
و ا
4د23ن Mو 012892 "17 N
I * (2ا( V42ه: 1
}) E = {(B , B , B );(B , B , R );(B , R , B );(R , B , B ); (B , R , R ); (R , B , R );(R , R , B );(R , R , R
3 1 3 4 1 6 3
= × = ) p (M ) × p (N و (S = ) p (N = ، = ) p (M =
4 2 8 8 2 8 4
3
= ) p (M ∩ N إذن و M ∩ N = {(B , B , R ); (B , R , B );(R , B , B )} (7
8
و ا
4د23ن Mو 2892 Nن
115
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻤﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺸﻔﻬﻲ ﻝﺩﺨﻭل ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻫﺩ .ﻭﻀﻊ 20ﺴﺅﺍل ﺩﺍﺨل ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﻤﻁﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﺜﻠﺔ 6 .ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻡ
ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ 5 ،ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ 4 ،ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻔﻴﺯﻴﺎﺀ 3 ،ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺭﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺴﺅﺍﻻﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺠﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺎﺕ.
(Iﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺸﺢ ﺍﻷﻭل ﺃﻥ ﻴﺴﺤﺏ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻴﺠﻴﺏ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺒﺩﺍﺨﻠﻬﺎ ﺜﻡ ﻴﺘﺭﻜﻬﺎ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻭ ﻴﺴﺤﺏ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ
ﻴﺠﻴﺏ ﻋﻥ ﻤﺎ ﺒﺩﺍﺨﻠﻬﺎ ﺜﻡ ﻴﺴﺤﺏ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ .
-1ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻤﺘﺤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺸﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺴﺅﺍﻝﻴﻥ ﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺴﺅﺍل ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻔﻴﺯﻴﺎﺀ ﺒﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ؟
-2ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻤﺘﺤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺸﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺴﺅﺍﻝﻴﻥ ﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺴﺅﺍل ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻔﻴﺯﻴﺎﺀ ؟
-3ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻤﺘﺤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺸﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺴﺅﺍل ﺤﻭل ﺍﻷﺩﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺭﺒﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ؟
-4ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻤﺘﺤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺸﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻭﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ؟
(IIﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺸﺢ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﻁﻠﺏ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺇﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻨﻔﺱ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺸﺢ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻓﻲ ﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻷﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﻝﻜﻥ ﺴﻤﺢ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻁ ﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻰ
ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﺠﺎﺏ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺒﺩﺍﺨﻠﻬﺎ .ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻤﺘﺤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺸﺢ :
-1ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺠﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ ؟
-2ﻓﻲ 3ﺃﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺩﺓ ؟
-3ﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﻤﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ ؟
-4ﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ؟
(IIIﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺸﺢ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺠﺎﺒﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻔﻴﺯﻴﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺭﺒﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺴﺤﺏ ﺴﺅﺍل
ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺃﺠﺎﺏ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺇﺠﺎﺒﺔ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺠﺎﺏ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺴﺤﺏ
ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺨﻴﺭ.
-1ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻤﺘﺤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺸﺢ ﻓﻲ 3ﺃﺴﺌﻠﺔ ؟
-2ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﺤﺼل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺸﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻤﺔ 10ﺒﻨﺎﺀﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺴﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻨﻘﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ؟
-3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺸﺢ ﻗﺩ ﺃﻤﺘﺤﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ .ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺤﺼﻭﻝﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻤﺔ 8؟
-4ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ Xﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﺘﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺸﺢ .
ﺃ( ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻋﻠﻰ . X
ﺏ( ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺃﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ .
ﺝ( ﻫل ﺍﻝﺘﻨﻘﻴﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺼﺎﻝﺢ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺸﺢ ؟
116
) ( B ) ، ( Aﺭﺍﻤﻴﺎ ﻗﻭﺱ ،ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻴﺴ ﺩﺩ ﺃﺴﻬﻤﻪ ﻨﺤﻭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻤﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﻨﺎﻁﻕ ) . ( III – II – I
ﺍﻝﺭﺍﻤﻴﺎﻥ ﻤﺎﻫﺭﺍﻥ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﺼﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺭﻤﻴﺔ
ﻝﻜﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻴﺘﻔﺎﻭﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻗﹼﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺴﺩﻴﺩ .
ﺇﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﺼﺎﺒﺔ ﻜل ﻤﻨﻁﻘﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻗﺒل ﻜل ﺭﺍﻤﻲ ﻫﻲ :
ﺏ( ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺘﺴﺩﻴﺩ ﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﺼﻴﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻁﻘﺔ III؟
ﺴﺩﺩﺕ ﻭ ﺃﺼﺎﺒﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻁﻘﺔ . IIIﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺭﺍﻤﻲ ) ﺃ ( ؟
ﺝ( ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻗﺩ
3 7
0، ، (3ﻗﺒل ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ،ﺍﻨﻀﻡ ﺭﺍﻡ ﺒﺎﺭﻉ Cﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﺼﺎﺒﺘﻪ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺎﻁﻕ III – II – Iﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻫﻲ
10 10
ﺘﻘﺭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺜﺭ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺴﺎﺒﻘﻴﻥ ﺒﺈﺠﺭﺍﺀ ﻗﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﻡ .
-ﺃﻋﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺠﺎﺒﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﻉ ) (2ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ
117
ﻤﻭﻀﻭﻉ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
ﻓﻲ ﺇﺤﺩﻯ ﺤﺩﺍﺌﻕ ﺍﻝﺘﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ﻤﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻨﺎﻁﻕ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ
ﻭ ﻤﻠﻭﻨﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﺒﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل .ﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ
ﺒﺘﺩﻭﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺘﻭﻗﻑ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺜﻭﺍﻨﻲ ﻭ ﻴﻌﻠﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺌﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺩﺩ ﺒﺎﻝﺴﻬﻡ .
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
" Aﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺌﺯ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝـ " 5
" Bﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺌﺯ ﻝﻴﺱ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ ﻝـ " 5
" Cﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺌﺯ ﺯﻭﺠﻲ ﻭ ﺃﻗل ﻤﻥ " 11
(2ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺘﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺩﻓﻊ ﻜل ﻻﻋﺏ 10ﺩﻨﺎﻨﻴﺭ ﺜﻡ ﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ
-ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻬﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﻜﺎﻥ ﻝﻭﻨﻪ ﺃﺯﺭﻗﺎ ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ 100 DA
-ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻬﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﻜﺎﻥ ﻝﻭﻨﻪ ﺒﻨﻴﺎ ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ 50 DA
-ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻬﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﻜﺎﻥ ﻝﻭﻨﻪ ﺃﺨﻀﺭﺍ ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ 10 DA
-ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻬﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﻜﺎﻥ ﻝﻭﻨﻪ ﺃﺼﻔﺭﺍ ﻻ ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﺃﻱ ﺸﻲﺀ .
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ Xﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺠﻨﻴﻪ ﻜل ﻻﻋﺏ ﻴﺠﺭﺏ ﺤﻅﻪ
-ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻠﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ Xﻭ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺃﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ .ﻫل ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻝﺔ ؟
ﺘﻌﺎﻝﻴﻕ ﺤل ﻤﺨﺘﺼﺭ
ﻴﻔﻀل ﺘﺼﻨﻴﻑ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭ E (1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ }E= {1;2;3;4;5;6;7;8;9;10;11;12;13;14;15
ﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ " ﺤﺴﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﻝـ 5ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﻫﻭ 3
ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻝﻭﺍﻥ " ﻭ ﺫﻝﻙ >Dد >A "B 3 1
= ) P (A = = ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺸﺠﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻴﺔ D> 15 5د >E "B
Bﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ A
3أرHم '>
AFـ 5
1 4
= p (B ) = 1 − p (A ) = 1 − ﻭﻤﻨﻪ
5 5
12ر
J>' "17 +Hـ 5
5 1
= = ) p (C
ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) p ( Bﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭﺓ 15 3
(2
ﻭﻝﻜﻥ ﻴﻔﻀل ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻤﻤﺎ ﺴﺒﻕ xi - 10 0 + 40 + 90
ﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻭﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ ) p (X = x i 7 4 2 2
ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻪ ) ﻗﻴﻡ ( X 15 15 15 15
118
ﻤﻭﻀﻭﻉ ﻤﻊ ﺇﺭﺸﺎﺩﺍﺕ
..... ......... ﺏ( ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Xﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻭﻻ ﻓﻲ . ℝ
ا.د اWوJ ا.د ا+5 -ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝـ X
ﺝ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ .
-2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻴﺭﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﺤل ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ ) ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ،ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ (
ﺃ( ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻤﻴﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ ﺴﺎﻝﺒﺎ؟
ﺏ( ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻻ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻭﻻ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ؟
ﺇﺭﺸﺎﺩﺍﺕ
( 1ﺃ( ﺘﻤﻸ ﺍﻝﺸﺠﺭﺓ ﺒﺎﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻔﺭﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺒﺎﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻭﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻭﻤﺔ
ﺍﻝﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻁﻴﻥ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺫﻝﻙ .
119
(2ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ؟ +KرA191-LK 0M
1ـ ال و ن ال
(3ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺠﺩﺍﺅﻫﻤﺎ ﺯﻭﺠﻲ ؟
(4ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﺩﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ 1ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻤﺎ ﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﺃﻜﻤل ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻭ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ
ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺘﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﺍﻻﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻ ﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ
6ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻨﺔ 6ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ . xi -5 0 2 7
ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ : Pi 0,3 0,2 0,3
(1ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻅﻬﺭ ؟
(2ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻅﻬﺭ ؟ xi 10 30 40 80 100
(3ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻅﻬﺭ ؟ Pi 0,5 0,2 0,15 0,1
(4ﻤﺎ ﺫﺍ ﻨﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻨﻲ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ
xi -6 -2 0 1 2 10
ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻅﻬﻭﺭﺍﻝﻅﻬﺭ؟
Pi 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,1 0,05
7ﻨﻀﻊ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻴﺩﻱ ﻁﻔل ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﻗﻼﻡ ﻤﻠﻭﻨﺔ ﺃﺨﻀﺭ ،ﺃﺤﻤﺭ
ﻭ ﺃﺼﻔﺭ ﻭ ﻨﻁﻠﺏ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺘﻠﻭﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺠﻪ ﺍﻝﺴﺘﺔ ﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺔ 2ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﺤﺠﺭﻱ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻨﻴﻴﻥ ،ﺍﺤﺩﻫﻤﺎ ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ ﺃﻭﺠﻬﻪ
ﺍﻝﺸﻜل .ﻤﺎ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻠﻭﻴﻥ ؟ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻤﻥ 1ﺍﻝﻰ 6ﻭ ﺍﻵﺨﺭ ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ﺃﻭﺠﻬﻪ
8ﺩﻓﻊ ﻻﻋﺏ x DAﻭ ﺃﺨﺫ ﺤﺠﺭﻱ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻴﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻤﻥ 1ﺍﻝﻰ 4
ﺭﻤﺎﻫﻤﺎ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻅﺎﻫﺭﻴﻥ ﻫﻭ ، 7ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺁﺤﺎﺩ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺘﺠﻴﻥ ﻭ
20DAﻭ ﺇﻻ ﻻ ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺸﻴﺊ . ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ
ﻜﻡ ﻴﺠﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺩﻓﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﺩﺍﻴﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ 3ﻴﻀﻡ ﻜﻴﺱ 10ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 0ﺍﻝﻰ . 9
ﻋﺎﺩﻝﺔ ؟ 3ﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ
ﻴﻀﻡ ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ Aﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﻭﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ
9
ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻴﻀﻡ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ Bﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ (1ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﺎ ؟
ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ . (2ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ؟
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ Aﻭ ﻨﻀﻌﻬﺎ (3ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ .
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ . B ﺃ(ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﻴﻥ ؟
(1ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ؟ ﺏ( ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻠﻭﻥ ؟
(2ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ Bﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺝ( ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ Xﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ،ﻋﺭﻑ
ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ؟ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝـ Xﻭ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺃﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻲ
(3ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ Bﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ 4ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﻭﺩ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ
ﺍﻝﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﻀﻌﻑ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ؟ (1ﺤﺩﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ .
10ﻴﻀﻡ ﻜﻴﺱ 49ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺍﻝﻰ ، 49ﻤﻨﻬﺎ 6 (2ﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﺠﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ
ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ .ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ (3ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ ﻭﺠﻪ ؟
ﺍﺭﺠﺎﻉ 6ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ 5ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﺤﺠﺭ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺘﻴﻥ .ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل
(1ﻤﺎ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻴﺔ ؟ ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ :
(1ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﻴﻥ ؟
120
(2ﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻹﺠﺎﺒﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل 4ﺭﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ (2ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ 3ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ 3ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ
14ﻴﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﻓﺭﻴﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻝﻌﺒﺔ ﺤﻅ ﺤﻴﺙ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻔﺸل ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ؟
. 0,65ﻗﺭﺭ ﻓﺭﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺎﻭﻝﺔ 3ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ) ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺃﻥ (3ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ 6ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ؟
ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻌﺽ ( .ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ Xﻝﻌﺩﺩ (4ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ 5ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ؟
ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺯ ﺨﻼل ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺤﺎﻭﻻﺕ. (5ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ 4ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ؟
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ : ﻴﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻗﺴﻡ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻁ ﻤﻥ 18ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﺍ ﻭ 12ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﺓ . 11
" Aﺩﻭﻤﺎ ﻴﻔﺸل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ " ﻴﺭﺍﺩ ﺘﺸﻜﻴل ﻝﺠﻨﺔ ﻝﻠﻘﺴﻡ ﺘﻀﻡ ﺭﺌﻴﺴﺎ ﻭ ﻨﺎﺌﺒﺎ ﻭ ﺃﻤﻴﻨﺎ ) ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
" Bﻴﻔﻭﺯ ﻤﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺎﻭﻻﻥ ﺕ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ " ﻤﻬﻡ (
(2ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ X (1ﻤﺎﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻠﺠﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﺸﻜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ؟
(3ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻝـ X (2ﻤﺎﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺘﺸﻜﻴل ﻝﺠﻨﺔ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ :
15ﻴﻀﻡ ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ 3ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ، 1 ﺃ( ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻤﻴﻥ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﺓ ؟
3 ، 2ﻭ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ . 3 ، 1 ، 1 ﺏ( ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ Xﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻠﺠﻨﺔ ؟
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ،ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Xﻋﺩﺩ ﺝ( ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺱ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻤﻴﻥ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﺓ ؟
ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻀﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺒﺔ .ﻭﻝﻴﻜﻥ Yﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺩ( ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺱ ﻭ ﻨﺎﺌﺒﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺠﻨﺴﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻥ ؟
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ (3ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺱ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﻤﻴﻥ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﺓ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ
(1ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻨﻲ ﺍﻹﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ Xﻭ Y Xﻻ ﻴﺭﻴﺩ ﺍﻹﻨﻀﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﻰ ﻝﺠﻨﺔ ﺘﻀﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﺓ . Y
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ Xﻭ Y -ﻤﺎﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻠﺠﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﺸﻜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻅﺭﻭﻑ ؟
(3ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺭﻨﺎ ﺍﻻﻤﺭ ﻴﺘﻌﻠﻕ ﺒﻠﻌﺒﺘﻴﻥ .ﻓﺄﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺭﺒﺤﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ 12ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ 20ﻜﺭﺓ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺍﻝﻰ 20ﻻ
ﻝﻼﻋﺏ ؟ ﻨﻔﺭﻕ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺱ .
16ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل Xﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﻜﻤﺎﻴﻠﻲ : -1ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ ،ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ :
α 1-2 3 4 ﺃ -ﻜﺭﺓ ﺘﺤﻤل ﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 4؟
1 1 1 ﺏ -ﻜﺭﺓ ﺘﺤﻤل ﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﻝﻴﺱ ﻤﻥ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ 5؟
) P (X = α a
34 5 -2ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺓ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺭﺠﺎﻉ ،
(1ﺤﺩﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ a
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ :
5
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) P (X = 2ﻭ ) ≥ P (Xﻭ ﺃ -ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺘﺤﻤﻼﻥ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 4؟
2
)P (X ≺ 1 ﺏ -ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﻫﻤﺎ ﺘﺤﻤل ﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 3
17ﻴﺤﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ 3ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 10ﻭ 3ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺘﺤﻤل ﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 4؟
ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ . 15 -3ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻵﻥ 3ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺭﺠﺎﻉ
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻜﺭﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Xﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ :
ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻤﺜل ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ . ﺃ -ﺜﻼﺙ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺃﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 4؟
(1ﺤﺩﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ . ﺏ -ﺜﻼﺙ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻤﻬﺎ ﺯﻭﺠﻲ ؟
(2ﺤﺩﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . X 13ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﻭﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻴﺔ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻭ ﻨﻬﺘﻡ
(3ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝـ .X ﺒﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺎﺀ
(4ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ . (1ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻭ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺃﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻲ ﻭ ﺘﺒﺎﻴﻨﻪ
121
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﺸﺠﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ ﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) p ( D (5ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ .
23ﻴﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﺭﻴﻕ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺴﻠﺔ ﻤﻥ 6ﻻﻋﺒﻴﻥ ﻤﻤﺘﺎﺯﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ (6ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ). P (X ≥ 25
ﺘﺴﺩﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﺓ .ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺇﺜﻨﻴﻥ ﻤﻨﻬﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﺴﺩﻴﺩ 18ﻴﺤﻭﻱ ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ 5ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ،1
، 80%ﻭ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻨﺠﺎﺤﻬﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﺴﺩﻴﺩ 90%ﻭ ﺁﺨﺭﻫﻡ 3 ، 3 ، 2ﻭ ، 4ﻭ ﺨﻤﺱ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ
ﻤﻨﺼﻭﺭ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺍﻝﺘﺴﺩﻴﺩ ﻋﻨﺩﻩ . 95 % 3 ، 2 ، 2 ، 1 ، 1ﺃﻴﻀﺎ .ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ
ﺤﻀﺭﻨﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﻴﻕ ﺤﻴﺙ ﻜل ﻻﻋﺏ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺅﻻﺀ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻭ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ Xﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ )(+1
ﻝﻪ ﻨﻔﺱ ﻓﺭﺹ ﺍﻝﺘﺴﺩﻴﺩ .ﺃﺨﺫﻨﺎ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺒﻴﻥ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺴﺤﺏ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺼﻔﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺴﺤﺏ
ﻨﻀﻊ Aﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ " ﻤﻨﺼﻭﺭ ﻀﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﺴﺩﻴﺩﺓ " ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ،ﻭ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ Yﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ
" Rﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﻨﺎﺠﺤﺔ " ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ .
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) p A ( R ) ، p ( A (1ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ Xﻭ .Y
ﻭ ) p (A ∩ R (2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻝﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ.
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) ) p ( Rﻴﻤﻜﻨﻙ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺸﺠﺭﺓ ( (3ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻜﻭﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻝﻌﺒﺘﻴﻥ .ﺃﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺭﺒﺤﺔ ﻝﻼﻋﺏ ؟
24ﻻﻋﺏ ﺘﻨﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻴﺩﺍﻥ ) ﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺭﺏ ( ﻴﻨﺠﺢ ﻓﻲ 19ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Xﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ
ﺍﻹﺭﺴﺎل ﺍﻷﻭل ﺒﻨﺴﺒﺔ 75%ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺭﺴﺎل ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﺒﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺘﺤﺩﺩ ﻜﻤﺎﻴﻠﻲ :
. 90% ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ ) ( 10-ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 1 •
ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﺭﺘﻜﺎﺒﻪ ﺨﻁﺄ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ) ﺇﺭﺴﺎل ﺨﺎﻁﺊ ﺒﺎﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ ) ( 10ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ 6 •
ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ (. ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ ) ( 0ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ •
ﻴﻀﻡ ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ 10ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺍﻝﻰ . 10 25 (1ﺤﺩﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺜﻡ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺠﺎﻉ . (2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﺭﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﻓﺭﻗﻬﻤﺎ . 4 ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ X
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﻓﺭﻗﻬﻤﺎ 4ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ (3ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﺭﺩ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻨﺔ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﻬﻤﺎ . 10 ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺠﻪ 5 ، 4 ، 3 ، 2 ، 1ﻫﻭ . 0,12
26ﻓﻲ ﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﻤﺎ % 55 ،ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﺩﺨﻨﻭﻥ ﻭ % 45 -ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ Xﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ
ﻤﻨﻬﻡ ﻤﺩﻤﻨﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﻬﻭﺓ ﻭ % 30ﻤﺩﺨﻨﻭﻥ ﻭ 2ـ ال ا
"! و ا
ادث ا
ﻤﺩﻤﻨﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﻬﻤﻭ .ﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﺭﺠﻼ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ﻤﻥ A 20ﻭ Bﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ Eﺤﻴﺙ
ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ : p A ( B ) = 0,8 ، p ( A ) = 0, 4ﻭ p A (B ) = 0, 2.
(1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺭﺠل ﻤﺩﺨﻨﺎ ،ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺩﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﺸﺠﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ ﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) p ( A ∩ Bﻭ ) p ( B
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﻬﻭﺓ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ ؟ A 21ﻭ Bﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ Eﺤﻴﺙ
(2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺭﺠل ﻤﺩﻤﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﻬﻭﺓ ،ﻤﺎﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل p ( A ∩ B ) = 0,3 ، p ( A ) = 0, 4
ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺩﺨﻨﺎ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ ؟ ﻭ p ( A ∩ B ) = 0, 2.
(3ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺩﺨﻨﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻤﺩﻤﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﻬﻭﺓ ؟ -ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) p A (Bﻭ ) p A ( B
27ﻴﻀﻡ ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻨﻘﺩﻴﺔ .ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻴﺔ ) ﺘﺤﻤل C ، B ، A 22ﻭ Dﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﻤﻥ Eﺤﻴﺙ
ﻭﺠﻪ ﻭﻅﻬﺭ ( ﻭ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺘﺤﻤل ﻭﺠﻬﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ p ( B ) = 0,5 ، p ( A ) = 0,3ﻭ p A ( D ) = 0, 05.
ﻤﻐﺸﻭﺸﺔ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﻫﻭ . 3/1ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ p B (D ) = 0,1ﻭ pC (D ) = 0, 2.
122
-2ﻤﺎﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﺒﻨﺘﺎ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺼﺭﺍ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﻴﻬﺎ ﻤﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .
ﺠﻴﺩﺍ ؟ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ل ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺠﻪ ) .ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻙ ﺘﺸﻜﻴل
32ﻴﻀﻡ ﻜﻴﺱ ﺨﻤﺱ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺍﻝﻰ 5 ﺍﻝﺸﺠﺭﺓ (.
ﻭ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 6ﺇﻝﻰ 8ﻭ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ 28ﻴﻀﻡ ﻜﻴﺱ 10ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﻭﻴﻥ .
ﺨﻀﺭﺍﻭﻴﻥ ﻴﺤﻤﻼﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ 9ﻭ . 10 ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ .
-ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺭﺠﺎﻉ . ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ B 1ﻝﻠﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ " ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ
-1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ "
" Aﺍﻝﻜﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﺘﺤﻤﻼﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﻴﻥ " ﻭ ﺒـ B 2ﻝﻠﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ "ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ "
" Bﺍﻝﻜﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻠﻭﻥ " -ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻹﺤﺘﻤﺎل ) p ( B 1ﺜﻡ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭﺓ ) p ( B 2 / B 1
" Cﺍﻝﻜﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﺘﺤﻤﻼﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻠﻭﻥ " ﻭ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ) p ( B 2 ∩ B 1
-ﻫل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﺎﻥ Aﻭ Bﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺘﺎﻥ ؟ B، A 29ﻜﻴﺴﺎﻥ .ﻴﻀﻡ Aﻜﺭﺓ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺨﻀﺭﺍﺀ.
-2ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ Bﻴﻀﻡ 3ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﺨﻀﺭﺍﺀ .
" Dﺍﻝﻜﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻝﻭﻨﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻥ " ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ Aﻭ ﻨﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ Bﺜﻡ
" Eﺍﻝﻜﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻝﻭﻨﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺘﺤﻤﻼﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﻴﻥ " ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ . B
-3ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻨﺎ ﺴﺤﺒﻨﺎ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻝﻭﻨﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻥ .ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل (1ﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﺸﺠﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ
ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﺎﻫﻤﺎ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﻴﻥ ؟ (2ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻠﻭﻥ .
(ر&#$
% (3ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ
33ﻴﻀﻡ ﻜﻴﺱ 7ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺎﺕ .ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ،ﺇﺜﻨﺘﺎﻥ ﺒﺸﺭﻁ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ .
ﺼﻔﺭﺍﻭﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﺨﻀﺭﺍﺀ . 30ﻴﻀﻡ ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﻭﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ.
ﺘﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺴﺤﺏ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ،ﻨﻌﻴﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻰ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻴﺭﺒﺢ 10DA ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻭ ﻨﻀﻴﻑ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺼﻔﺭﺍﺀ ﻴﺨﺴﺭﺭ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ 5DA ﻨﻌﻴﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻤﻊ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﺜﻡ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺨﻀﺭﺍﺀ ﻴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﺴﺤﺏ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ .
ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﻭﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ ،ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ (1ﺸﻜﹼل ﺍﻝﺸﺠﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ
ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ 8DAﻭ ﺇﻻ ﻴﺨﺴﺭ 4DA (2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ﻨﻬﺘﻡ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭﻱ ) ﺭﺒﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺴﺎﺭﺓ ( ﻓﻲ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ . " Aﻴﻭﺠﺩ 3ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ "
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Eﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ " Bﻴﻭﺠﺩ 5ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ"
(1ﺃ( ﺃﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﺸﺠﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ 31ﻴﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻗﺴﻡ ﻤﻥ % 25ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻨﺎﺕ ﻭ % 75ﻤﻥ
ﺏ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ " Gﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﺭﺍﺒﺢ " ﺍﻷﻭﻻﺩ .
ﺝ( ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ Eﻭ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﻤل ﻨﻔﺘﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ % 60ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻨﺎﺕ ﻭ % 30ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻻﺩ ﻫﻡ
ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﺠﻴﺩﻭﻥ .ﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ .
(2ﻗﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭﻱ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻘﺘﺭﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺤﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ -1ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ :
ﺴﺤﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺒﺔ ﺠـ -ﺠﻴﺩﺍ ؟ ﺏ -ﻭﻝﺩﺍ ؟ ﺃ -ﺒﻨﺘﺎ ؟
ﻋﺎﺩﻝﺔ.
123
*+ــ) 34ﻫﺩﻑ ﻭ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ :
(Y) ، (X) 37ﺭﺍﻤﻴﺎ ﻗﻭﺱ ،ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻴﺴﺩﺩ ﺴﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﺤﻭ ﺭﺍﻤﻲ ﻗﻭﺱ ﺒﺎﺭﻉ ﺩﻭﻤﺎ ﻴﺼﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻝﻜﻥ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺇﺼﺎﺒﺔ
ﻫﺩﻑ .ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺼﺎﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ 0,90 ، 0,85 ﺃﻴﺔ ﻤﻨﻁﻘﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻰ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ . ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻜﻜل .
(1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺕ ﺃﻥ :
-ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﺼﺎﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﻤﻲ ) ( Xﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﻁﻕ III – II – I 50
7 1 1 100
. ، ، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻫﻭ 400
12 3 12 4
1000 1 2 3
-ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﺼﺎﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﻤﻲ ) ( Yﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﻁﻕ III – II – I
ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ .
-1ﺍﻝﺭﺍﻤﻲ ) ( Xﻴﺴﺩﺩ ﺴﻬﻤﻪ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ :
ﺃ -ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﺼﻴﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻁﻘﺔ III؟
ﺏ -ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺇﺼﺎﺒﺔ III – II – Iﺒﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ؟
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Xﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺘﺴﺩﻴﺩ ﺴﻬﻡ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ
ﺠـ -ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﺼﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﻁﻕ III – II – I؟
(1ﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝـ .X
-2ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﻤﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﻤﻲ
(2ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﻨﻤﺎل ﻝـ .X
) ( Xﻀﻌﻑ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﻝﺭﺍﻤﻲ ) . ( Y
(3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻨﺠﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ.
ﺃ -ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺘﺴﺩﻴﺩ ﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﺼﻴﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ
35ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ Aﻋﻠﻰ 3ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 1
ﺍﻝﺭ ﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻁﻘﺔ III؟
ﻭ ﻜﺭﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﺘﺤﻤﻼﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ -1ﻭ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ. 0
ﺴﺩﺩﺕ ﻭ ﺃﺼﺎﺒﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻁﻘﺔ III
ﺏ -ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻗﺩ
ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ Bﻋﻠﻰ 3ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ -1ﻭ ﻜﺭﻴﺘﺎﻥ
ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺭﺍﻤﻲ ) ( X؟
ﺘﺤﻤﻼﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 0ﻭ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ. 1
38ﺴﻤﻴﺭ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻴﺭ ﺼﺩﻴﻘﺎﻥ ﺤﻤﻴﻤﺎﻥ .ﻴﺩﺭﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ
ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻜﻴﺴﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺴﻴﻥ ﺜﻡ ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺘﺎﺒﻊ
ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﺌﻲ .ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻯ ﺴﻤﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻜﺎﻑ ﻗﺎل ﻋﻨﻪ
ﻭ ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ.
ﺍﻷﺴﺘﺎﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻨﺠﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﻜﺎﻭﺭﻴﺎ . 0.5
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ Xﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺘﻴﻥ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻨﺠﻊ ﻤﻨﻴﺭ ﻫﻭ 0.7ﻓﺄﺤﺴﺏ:
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺘﻴﻥ.
-1-ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻌﻴﺸﺎ ﻤﻌﺎ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﺓ.
.1ﺤﺩﺩ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل .X
-2-ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻥ ﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﻋﻤﺭ ﻭﺤﺩﻩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﺓ. Y>@ 8%X 50 ; (+I 1D 36ا=ل اZ[ ) ;+2
- 3-ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﺓ. ( +أو أ Z[(+Iزر\ء .
-4-ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻥ ﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﻴﻭﺴﻑ ﻭﺤﺩﻩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﺓ. ﻋﺩﺩﻨﺎ 20ﺸﺨﺼﺎ ﻝﻬﻡ ﻝﺤﻰ 15 ،ﺸﺨﺹ ﻝﻬﻡ ﺃﻋﻴﻥ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ
-7-ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺤﺼﻠﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ . ﻨﻀﻊ " Rﺭﺠل ﻝﻪ ﻝﺤﻴﺔ " " B ،ﺭﺠل ﻝﻪ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﻭﺘﺎﻥ "
124
1
A ، ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻫﻭ
8
B
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻁﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﻴﻥ :
RH +
AB -ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻤﺎ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺒﺸﺭﻁ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ
O 1
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺴﺎﺒﻘﺎ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻫﻭ
20
RH − -ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻤﺎ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺒﺸﺭﻁ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ
(2ﺃﺨﺫ ﺸﺨﺹ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻨﺔ ،ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل 1
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺴﺎﺒﻘﺎ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﻫﻭ
ﺃ( ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﺼﻴﻠﺘﻪ ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ؟ 20
-1ﺇﺫﺍ ﺴﺤﺒﻨﺎ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ .
ﺏ( ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﺼﻴﻠﺘﻪ ﺴﺎﻝﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺯﻤﺭﺘﻪ O؟
ﺃ -ﺃﻜﻤل ﺍﻝﺸﺠﺭﺓ ) ﺍﻝﻌﻨﻜﺒﻭﺘﻴﺔ ( ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
41ﻴﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻴﺔ ﻭﺁﻻﺕ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ
..... .........
ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﺩﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﻀﻌﻑ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ
ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ .ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﺨﻠل ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻴﺔ ﻫﻭ 0,05ﺃﻤﺎ ^ داء
.....
ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻬﻭ 0,03 .....
B+ء
ﺃﺨﺫ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ .ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ 1 ..... .........
8
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ :
B+ء
(1ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻴﺔ . ..... .........
(2ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ
اة اWوJ اة ا+5
(3ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺨﻠل ؟
(4ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺨﻠل . ﺏ( ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Xﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ
(B)،(A) 42ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻗﺎﻥ .ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ) ( Aﻴﺤﻭﻱ 5 ﻀﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺘﻴﻥ ،ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ
ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ 5ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ) ( B ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .X
ﻓﻴﺤﻭﻱ 7ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ 3ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﻭ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺝ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ .
ﻤﺘﻤﺎﺜﻠﺔ . -2ﺇﺫﺍ ﺴﺤﺒﻨﺎ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ) ( Bﻭ ﻨﺴﺠل ) ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ،ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ (
ﻝﻭﻨﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻨﻌﻴﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ) ( Bﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺃ( ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ؟
ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺠل ﻝﻭﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ . ﺏ( ﻤﺎ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ؟
-1ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻴﻥ ؟ 40ﺍﻝﺯﻤﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﻤﻭﻴﺔ :
-2ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻠﻭﻥ ؟ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﺒﻴﻥ ﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﺍﻝﺯﻤﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﻤﻭﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ
-3ﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﻝﻌﺒﺔ ﻜﻤﺎﻴﻠﻲ ﺘﻤﻨﺢ ﻝﻜل ﻜﺭﺓ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺱ.
) ( α +ﻭ ﻝﻜل ﻜﺭﺓ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ ) . ( α - ﺍﻝﺯﻤﺭﺓ O A B AB
ﺃ -ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻠﻌﻼﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﺌﻴﺔ X Rh + 39% 38% 6% 2%
ﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ. Rh - 6% 6% 2% 1%
ﺏ -ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ αﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻤل (1ﺃﻜﻤل ﺍﻝﺸﺠﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
125
-2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Tﺍﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻝﻠﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺘﺤﻤﻠﻪ -4ﻨﻀﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ) n-3 ، ( Bﻜﺭﺓ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ
ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ .ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﻤل ﻭ ﻨﻌﻴﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ .
ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 4ﻭ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ . ﺃ -ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻴﻥ ؟
45ﻴﻀﻡ ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ 10ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 0ﺇﻝﻰ 9ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺏ -ﻜﻡ ﻤﻥ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ )(B
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺴﺤﺏ 3ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ . ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﻴﻥ ﻫﻭ 0,25؟
ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) ( x , y , zﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻤﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﺴﺤﺒﻬﺎ. 43ﻴﺴﺩﺩ ﺭﺍﻤﻲ ﺜﻼﺙ ﺭﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
-1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ : ﻨﺤﻭ ﻫﺩﻑ ) ﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ( .
3
* ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻁ ﺍﻷﻭل ) ( x = y = zﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ).p(1 2 ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺇﺼﺎﺒﺔ
* ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻁ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ) ( x = y ≠ zﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ )p(2 1 ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﻤﻲ ﻝﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻫﻭ . 0,7
* ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻁ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ) (x = z ≠ yﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ).p(3 -1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﺼﻴﺏ
* ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻁ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﺒﻊ ) ( y = z ≠ xﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ).p(4 ﺍﻝﺭﺍﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ؟
* ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻁ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻤﺱ ) x , y , zﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ( ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ -2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﺼﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ ؟
).p(5 -3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﺼﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ
-2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ). p(1) + p(2) + p(3) + p(4) + p(5 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ؟
-ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ؟ -4ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﻨﺎﻁﻕ )ﺍﻝﺸﻜل (
-3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻴﺭﺒﺢ 11 DAﺇﺫﺍ ﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻁ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﺼﻴﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻁﻘﺔ ) (1ﻫﻭ 0,1
ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﺒﻊ ﻭ ﻴﺨﺴﺭ a DAﺇﺫﺍ ﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻁ ﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﺼﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻁﻘﺔ ) (2ﻫﻭ 0,2ﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ
ﺍﻷﻭل ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻤﺱ . ﻴﺼﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻁﻘﺔ ) (3ﻫﻭ 0,4ﻓﺄﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل .
ﺃ -ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻠﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺘﺏ ﻋﻥ ﻜل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃ -ﺃﻥ ﻴﺼﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻁﻘﺔ ) (1ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ؟
ﺴﺤﺏ . ﺏ -ﺃﻥ ﺘﺼﻴﺏ ﻜل ﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﻤﻨﻁﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ؟
ﺏ -ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ . X -5ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻨﻭﺤﺔ ﻝﻠﺭﺍﻤﻲ ،ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺼﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻁﻘﺔ
ﺠـ -ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ aﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺏ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﺩل ) ﻻ ) (1ﻝﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ 10ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻁﻘﺔ ) (2ﻝﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ 7ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻁﻘﺔ
ﺨﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻻ ﺭﺒﺢ ( ؟ ) (3ﻝﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ 5ﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺨﻁﺄ ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ
46ﻴﺭﻴﺩ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺘﺼل ﺒﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﻫﺎﺘﻔﻴﺎ ﻝﻜﻨﻪ -ﻝﺴﻭﺀ ﺤﻅﻪ ﺼﻔﺭ.
-ﻨﺴﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ،ﻓﻘﺭﺭ ﻋﺒﺜﺎ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺒﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﻭ -ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝـ Xﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل
ﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﺘﺸﻜﻴل ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻤﻥ 6ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ Pﻫﻭ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ .
ﻴﺼﻴﺏ ﻤﺒﺘﻐﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺎﻭﻝﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ. 44ﻴﻀﻡ ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﺨﻤﺱ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
−6
( n ×10 ﺘﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ) ) ( x ، 4 ، 3 ، 2 ، 1ﺤﻴﺙ xﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ،ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
-1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . P ) p(nﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ . nﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺕ ﺃﻥ
-2ﺘﺫﻜﺭ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﺃﻤﺭﺍ ﻫﺎﻤﺎ ،ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻴﻀﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻻﻋﺩﺍﺩ ) p(x) , p(4) , p (3) , p(2) , p(1ﺒﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
ﺯﻭﺠﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﻴﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ .ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺃﻨﺕ Pﺇﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻁﻌﺕ . ﺘﺸﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . 15/1
-3ﺒﻌﺩ ﻗﻠﻴل ﺘﺫﻜﺭ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﺸﻴﺌﺎ ﺁﺨﺭ .ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﺩﻴﺔ -1ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ )p(x) , p(4) , p (3) , p(2) , p(1
ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺭﻗﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ ".3ﺇﻥ ﻜﻨﺕ ﺫﻜﻴﺎ" ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
.P
126
48ﻴﻀﻡ ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ 5ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺎﺕ 4،ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ. -4ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﺒﻨﻔﺴﻪ ﻴﺅﻜﺩ ﻝﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺠﻴﻴﻥ
(1ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﻬﻤﺎ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 10ﻓﻬل ﺒﺈﻤﻜﺎﻨﻙ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ P؟
6ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺠﺎﻉ .ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Xﻋﺩﺩ -5ﺴﺄل ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﺃﺨﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻲ .ﻫل ﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻫﺎﺘﻑ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ؟
ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ .ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝـ X ﻗﺎل ﻋﻠﻲ :ﻻ ،ﻝﻜﻨﻲ ﺃﻋﺭﻑ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻀﻡ ﺃﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﺔ
ﻭ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺃﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ . ﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﺜﻨﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺎﻥ .ﺴﺎﻋﺩﻫﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﺕ ﺒﺤﺴﺎﺏ .P
(2ﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﺴﺤﺏ nﻤﺭﺓ ) ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ( . -6ﻭ ﻴﺼﺭﺥ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﻝﻘﺩ ﺘﺫﻜﺭﺕ .ﺇﻥ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺠﻴﻴﻥ
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ X nﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ.
ﻫﻭ 8ﻭ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﻪ ﺍﻻﻭل ﻭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻷﺨﻴﺭ ﻫﻭ . 7ﻫل ﺘﺘﻜﺭﻡ
-ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ X nﻭ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺃﻤﻠﻪ
ﺃﻨﺕ ﺒﺤﺴﺎﺏ P؟
ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ .
-7ﻭ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻤﺤﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﺇﺴﺘﻁﺎﻉ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﺍﻹﺘﺼﺎل ﺒﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ
X
(3ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Y nﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ nﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻤﺜﹼل ﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍﺕ ﻀﺤﻙ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍ ﻝﺴﻤﺎﻋﻪ ﺍﻝﻘﺼﺔ ﻭ ﻗﺎل ﻝﻪ ﻴﺎ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﺘﺫﻜﺭ ﺩﺍﺌﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ
n
ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﺘﻔﻲ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ 30ﻭ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺭﺒﻌﺔ
-ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ Y nﻭ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺃﻤﻠﻪ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻓﺈﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻘﺎﺀ .
ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ . -ﺇﻥ ﻓﻬﻤﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﺼﺔ ﻓﻤﺎ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻫﺎﺘﻑ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ؟
49ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ 10ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻻ ﻨﻔﺭﻕ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ 47ﻓﻲ ﻝﻌﺒﺔ ﻴﺭﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺴﺔ ﻤﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ
ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺱ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﺼﻔﺭﺍﺀ 7 ،ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﻭﻴﻥ. ﻭ ﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺯﻭﺠﻴﺎ ﺴﻤﺢ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﻭ
ﻓﻲ ﻝﻌﺒﺔ ﺘﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺘﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺒﻌﺩ 10ﺭﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺠﺒﺎﺭﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺒﺘﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻋﻥ
ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺼﻔﺭﺍﺀ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺘﺘﻭﻗﻑ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻲ ﺘﻠﻘﺎﺌﻴﺎ .
ﻏﻴﺭ ﺼﻔﺭﺍﺀ ،ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺔ -1ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻝﻰ؟
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ.
-2ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ؟
.1ﺃ -ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺼﻔﺭﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻷﻭل؟
-3ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺤﺼﻭﻝﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ
ﺏ -ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻷﻭل؟
ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ 0,03ﻓﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻻ ﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ
ﺝ -ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺼﻔﺭﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ
ﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯﻩ ؟
ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ
-4ﺘﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ 1DAﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﻜل
ﺍﻷﻭل؟
ﻤﺤﺎﻭﻝﺔ ) ﻭ ﻻ ﻴﺩﻓﻊ ﻤﺎﺩﺍﻡ ﻴﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺯﻭﺠﻲ ( ﻋﻠﻰ
.2ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺸﺠﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ
ﺃﻥ ﻴﺭﺒﺢ 5DAﺇﺫﺍ ﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺯﻭﺠﻲ .
ﺃ -ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻷﻭل
ﻭ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ؟ ﺃ -ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ 20 DA؟
ﺏ -ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ ﺏ -ﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﻴﺨﺴﺭ ﻭ ﻻ ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ؟
28 -5ﺘﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :ﺼﺎﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺠﻲ
. ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﻫﻭ
45 ﻴﺭﺒﺢ 5 DAﻭ ﺼﺎﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﺩﻱ ﻴﺨﺴﺭ 2 DAﻭ
.3ﻻﻋﺏ ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜل ﻻﻋﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺤﺎﻭل 3ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﻝﺯﺍﻤﻴﺎ .
ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ 4.ﺃﺸﺨﺎﺹ ﻴﺸﺎﺭﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ.
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Xﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻪ .
ﻻ ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﺃﺤﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ.
ﺃ -ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃ ﹼ
-ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝـ Xﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ
ﺏ -ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﺸﺨﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻤﻥ
ﻭ ﺍﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ .
ﺍﻷﺸﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ.
127
ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺩﺩ
60 % 53ﻤﻥ ﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻤﻁﻌﻤﺔ ) ( Vﻀﺩ ﻤﺭﺽ ﻤﺎ ، 50ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺴﺅﺍل ﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ
ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ 5 %ﻤﻨﻬﻡ ﺤﺴﺎﺴﻴﺔ ، Aﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﺨﺎﺹ
Aﻭ Bﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻓﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎﻝﻲ ﺤﻴﺙ
ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻌﻤﻴﻥ 10 % ،ﻋﺭﻀﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺴﺎﺴﻴﺔ . A
p(B) = 0,4 ، P(A) = 0,7ﻭ p ( A ∪ B ) = 0, 2
ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺸﺨﺼﺎ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻤﻁﻌﻤﺎ ،ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﺭﻀﺔ
(1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ) p ( A ∪ Bﻫﻲ :
ﻝﻠﺤﺴﺎﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻭ :
0,6(c 1,1(b 0,9 (a
p A (V ) (a
(2ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ) p (A ∩ Bﻫﻲ :
p (V ) (b
0,1(c 0,2(b 0,8 (a
pV ( A) (c
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ) p ( A ∩ Bﻫﻲ :
0,10 (d
0,3(c 0,1(b 0,8 (a
0,05 (e
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ) p ( A ∪ Bﻫﻲ :
0,6 (f
0,1(c 0,9(b 0,8 (a
B ، A 54ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺘﺎﻥ
51ﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﺼﺤﻴﺢ
p ( A ∩ B ) = P ( A ) × p ( B ) (a
ﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺒﺭﻨﻭﻝﻲ ﺤﻴﺙ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻫﻭ Pﻭ
p A ( B ) = p ( A ) (b
ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻹﺨﻔﺎﻕ ﻫﻭ q
p B ( A ) = p (A ) (c
p < 1 (a
p ( A ∪ B ) = P ( A ) × p ( B ) (d p = q (b
P ( B ) = 1 − p (A ) (e p > q (c
55ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﻌ ﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻤﺎ : p < 0,5 (d
p = 1 - q (e
xi 1 2 3 4 5 6
52ﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﺼﺤﻴﺢ
pi 0,1 0,25 0,1 0,15 0,2 0,2
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻁﻌﻡ 60 %ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺄﻜﻭﻻﺕ ﺴﻤﻙ ) ( S
20 %ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺠﺎﺕ ) ( Gﻭ 30 %ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﺃﺴﻤﺎﻙ ﻭ ﻻ
-1ﻴﻀﺭﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 100ﺇﺫﺍ ﺤﻭﻝﺕ
ﻤﺜﻠﺠﺎﺕ .
ﺍﻹﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻰ ﻨﺴﺏ ﻤﺌﻭﻴﺔ .
p (S ) = 0, 40 (a
-2ﻴﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺒـ 1ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻀﻴﻑ ﻝﻜل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . 1
p (S ∪ G ) = 0,8 (b
-3ﻴﻨﻘﺹ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺒﻨﺴﺒﺔ 20%ﺇﺫﺍ ﻨﻘﺼﺕ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺒﻨﻔﺱ p (S ∩ G ) = 0,1 (c
ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ . p (S ∩ G ) = 0,5 (d
-4ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺴﺘﺒﺩﻝﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ 6ﺒﺎﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ 7ﻴﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻤل ﺒﻤﻘﺩﺍﺭ 0,2 S ∩ G ; S ∩ G (eﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﻼﺌﻤﺘﻴﻥ
128